UG2100280.3 - Iss - D - Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part (Page Blocks 02 To 08)

A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_
UG2100280.3 N
a
Procedural Support Document t

c
Issue: D
o
_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part y

r
i
g
h
t
(Page Blocks 02 to 08) _

F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
<SUMMARY_BEGIN>SUMM ARY :
N
a
PURPOSE/SCOPE: t
c
o
_
B
o
This document is related to technical data authoring activities and so to the process SU.ED.03.03 x
1
“Generate Technical Data”. V

_
N
It describes the general policy applicable to the Maintenance Procedures (MP) and the different a
t
c
types of Page Blocks. o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
This document is applicable to: a
t
- A320 Family / A330/A340 / A380 c

o
_
B
o
x
This document does not concern: 2
V
- A350 _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
<SUMMARY_END>
c
o
_
Document Owner: Authorizer for Application: B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
Name: Marie-Line SOURZAC Name: Dorothee TOULMONDE 3
b
Function: AMM Product Leader Function: HO TD Products Definition V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
4
V
© AIRBUS SAS 2022. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY DOCUMENT. _
N
Q10_Procedural Support Document_FM0902924_v4.4 Printed Copies are not controlled. Confirm this is the latest issue available through the Hub. Page 1 of 241 a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_
Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part N

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
(Page Blocks 201 to 899) o
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
Table of Contents y
r
i
g
h
1 How to Read this User Guide (UG)? ................................................................................. 16 t
_
F
o
2 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 17 o
t
e
r
3 General Policy Applicable to Maintenance Tasks .............................................................. 19 V
_
N
3.1 Interchangeability .............................................................................................................. 19 a

t
c
o
3.2 Customer Originated Changes (COC) ............................................................................... 19 _

B
o
x
3.3 Repairs, Allowable Damage and Flight Allowance............................................................. 19 1
V
_
3.3.1 General Rules .............................................................................................................. 19 N

a
t
c
3.3.2 GRDAS workflow .......................................................................................................... 20 o

_
B
o
3.4 Standalone Changes......................................................................................................... 22 x

1
a
3.5 Concessions ..................................................................................................................... 24 V

_
N
a
t
3.6 Independent/Double Inspection ......................................................................................... 24 c
o
_
B
3.7 Maintenance Personnel Qualification & Skills.................................................................... 24 o
x
2
3.8 Maintenance Human Error Analysis (MHEA)..................................................................... 25 V

_
N
a
3.9 Language to be used in Maintenance Tasks ..................................................................... 25 t
c
o
_
3.10 Typical Sentences ............................................................................................................. 25 B
o
x
2
3.11 Highlight ............................................................................................................................ 26 a
V
_
3.11.1 Definition ...................................................................................................................... 26 N
a
t
c
3.11.2 Rules ............................................................................................................................ 26 o
_
B
o
x
2
© AIRBUS SAS 2022. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY DOCUMENT.
b
Printed Copies are not controlled. Confirm this is the latest issue available
V through the Hub. Page 2 of 241
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
3.12 Abbreviations/Acronyms.................................................................................................... 28 _
D
o
c
3.13 Deletion or Non Publication of a Task ............................................................................... 29 _

C
o
p
y
4 AMM general structure ...................................................................................................... 30 r
i
g
h
4.1 Page Block structure ......................................................................................................... 30 t
_
F
o
4.1.1 Title of the page block .................................................................................................. 30 o
t
e
r
4.1.2 Task Title ...................................................................................................................... 31 V
_
N
4.1.3 Subtask Title................................................................................................................. 32 a
t
c
o
4.1.4 Effectivity splitting ......................................................................................................... 33 _
B
o
x
5 Task structure ................................................................................................................... 34 1
V
_
5.1 Zone .............................................................................................................................. 35 N
a
t
c
5.2 Reason for the job ............................................................................................................. 36 o
_
B
o
5.2.1 Non-scheduled TASKS ................................................................................................. 37 x
1
a
5.2.2 Scheduled TASKS ........................................................................................................ 39 V

_
N
a
5.2.3 Servicing Task .............................................................................................................. 40 t

c
o
_
5.2.3.1 For SA / LR................................................................................................................... 40 B

o
x
2
5.2.3.2 For A380 ...................................................................................................................... 40 V

_
N
5.2.4 Component Weight ....................................................................................................... 41 a

t
c
o
5.2.4.1 Component Weight Warning ......................................................................................... 41 _

B
o
x
5.2.4.2 Reason for the Job ....................................................................................................... 41 2

a
5.3 Job Set-Up Information ..................................................................................................... 42 _

N
a
t
c
5.3.1 Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment ............................................................... 43 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
5.3.1.1 The non-specific tools (also called “No Specific” or “Standard”) .................................... 43 _
D
o
c
5.3.1.1.1 Standard Tool Request ....................................................................................... 43 _

C
o
p
5.3.1.2 The specific tools (also called “Non-standard”) ............................................................. 44 y

r
i
g
h
5.3.1.2.1 Specific Tool Request ......................................................................................... 44 t
_
F
o
5.3.1.2.2 Tool Assembly .................................................................................................... 50 o
t
e
r
5.3.1.2.3 Tool Quantity ...................................................................................................... 52 V
_
N
5.3.1.2.4 Task Publication When a Specific Tool is not yet Released ................................ 52 a
t
c
o
5.3.2 Special Transit Packages ............................................................................................. 53 _
B
o
x
5.3.3 Consumable Materials .................................................................................................. 54 1
V
_
5.3.3.1 CML update request ..................................................................................................... 56 N
a
t
c
5.3.4 Work Zones and Access Panels ................................................................................... 61 o
_
B
o
5.3.5 Expendable Parts ......................................................................................................... 61 x
1
a
5.3.5.1 General Information ...................................................................................................... 61 V

_
N
a
5.3.5.2 How to use EXPD/EXPE/EXPEngine tags .................................................................... 62 t

c
o
_
5.3.6 Cross-references .......................................................................................................... 63 B

o
x
2
5.3.6.1 Internal cross-references .............................................................................................. 63 V

_
N
5.3.6.2 External Cross-References ........................................................................................... 65 a

t
c
o
5.3.6.3 Cross-reference to a SIL / TFU / AOT / OIT/ AD / ISI article ......................................... 65 _

B
o
x
5.3.6.3.1 SIL / TFU / OIT / ISI Article ................................................................................. 65 2

a
5.3.6.3.2 AD / AOT ............................................................................................................ 65 _

N
a
t
c
5.3.6.3.3 Rules for reference to a CMM (Manufacturer or Vendor) .................................... 67 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
5.3.6.3.4 Rules for reference to a supplier document ........................................................ 68 _

D
o
c
5.4 Job Set-up......................................................................................................................... 69 _

C
o
p
y
5.4.1 Job Set-up Content....................................................................................................... 69 r
i
g
h
5.4.2 No special Job Set-up necessary ................................................................................. 70 t
_
F
o
5.4.3 Rules for safety precautions ......................................................................................... 71 o
t
e
r
5.4.3.1 Safety barriers .............................................................................................................. 71 V
_
N
5.4.3.2 Safety rules tool (** ON A330 NEO ONLY) ................................................................... 71 a
t
c
o
5.4.4 Location of a command on a panel (**ON A380 ONLY) ................................................ 72 _
B
o
x
5.4.5 Cross-reference to another task ................................................................................... 73 1
V
_
5.4.6 Access to Circuit Breakers............................................................................................ 73 N
a
t
c
5.4.7 Access to the work area ............................................................................................... 74 o
_
B
o
5.4.8 Access Platform and Safety Attachment Points ............................................................ 76 x
1
a
5.5 Procedure ......................................................................................................................... 78 V

_
N
a
5.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 78 t

c
o
_
5.5.2 Corrective actions ......................................................................................................... 78 B

o
x
2
5.5.3 Case of the data loading task (P. Block 03) (**ON A380 ONLY) ................................... 79 V
_
N
5.5.3.1 On Board Maintenance System (OMS) Architecture ..................................................... 79 a

t
c
o
5.5.3.2 Data Loading and Configuration System (DLCS) .......................................................... 79 _

B
o
x
5.5.3.3 Data Loading – General principles ................................................................................ 80 2

a
5.5.3.3.1 Aircraft configuration for uploading of software to the aircraft systems in ATA XX:80 _
N
a
t
c
5.5.3.3.2 Tag for the software configuration check of the equipment ................................. 81 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
5.5.3.3.3 Tag for the uploading of software to the equipment ............................................ 82 _

D
o
c
5.5.4 Case of the removal / Installation task (P. Block 04) ..................................................... 96 _
C
o
p
y
5.5.5 Case of the Adjustment: test task (P.Block 05) ............................................................. 97 r
i
g
h
5.5.5.1 BITE test Task (**ON A380 ONLY)).............................................................................. 97 t
_
F
o
5.5.5.1.1 System BITE overview........................................................................................ 97 o
t
e
r
5.5.5.1.2 BITE Description Document (BDD) (Required by ABD 200) ............................... 98 V
_
N
5.5.5.1.3 BDD content for each system BITE .................................................................... 99 a
t
c
o
5.5.5.1.4 BITE source data access .................................................................................... 99 _
B
o
BITE task – Access to XML file ........................................................................... 99

x
5.5.5.1.5 1
V
_
5.5.5.1.6 Authoring rules ..................................................................................................100 N
a
t
c
5.5.5.1.7 Specific tag for BITE test selection ....................................................................101 o
_
B
o
5.5.6 Reference to an illustration in the text ..........................................................................110 x
1
a
5.5.7 Text optimization within the task ..................................................................................111 V

_
N
a
5.5.8 Circuit breaker in the procedure paragraph..................................................................111 t

c
o
_
5.5.9 WARNING to be entered .............................................................................................112 B

o
x
2
5.5.10 Repetition of a privileged data .....................................................................................112 V

_
N
5.5.11 Torque value ...............................................................................................................113 a

t
c
o
5.5.11.1 Specific torque values .................................................................................................113 _

B
o
x
5.5.11.2 Standard torque values................................................................................................114 2

a
5.5.11.2.1 Normal cases ....................................................................................................114 _

N
a
t
c
5.5.11.2.2 Specific cases: for fuel or hydraulic fluid connections ........................................115 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
5.5.11.3 Traceability of torque value source data ......................................................................116 _

D
o
c
5.5.11.4 Units ............................................................................................................................117 _

C
o
p
y
5.5.12 Numeric value .............................................................................................................117 r
i
g
h
5.5.13 Bonding .......................................................................................................................118 t
_
F
o
5.6 Close-up (Para. 5) ............................................................................................................118 o
t
e
r
6 WARNINGS / CAUTIONS / NOTES .................................................................................122 V
_
N
6.1 Definitions ........................................................................................................................122 a
t
c
o
6.2 Position ............................................................................................................................122 _
B
o
x
6.3 Creation ...........................................................................................................................123 1
V
_
6.4 Warnings for Consumable Materials.................................................................................124 N
a
t
c
6.4.1 General Warning .........................................................................................................124 o
_
B
o
6.4.2 Specific Warnings for the lockwire and the cotter pins .................................................124 x
1
a
6.5 Warning/Caution for referenced task ................................................................................125 V

_
N
a
6.6 Warning for CDCCL .........................................................................................................125 t

c
o
_
6.7 Warning related to component weight ..............................................................................126 B

o
x
2
6.8 Caution Related to Removable Structural Components (RSC) .........................................126 V

_
N
6.9 Note .............................................................................................................................127 a

t
c
o
6.9.1 Definition .....................................................................................................................127 _

B
o
x
6.9.2 Position .......................................................................................................................127 2

a
7 Directives for specific tools (also called non-standard tools).............................................128 _

N
a
t
c
7.1 General Information .........................................................................................................128 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
7.2 Alternative Tool Part Number ...........................................................................................129 _

D
o
c
8 Directive specific to attaching parts ..................................................................................130 _

C
o
p
y
8.1 Bolts, Nuts, Washers........................................................................................................130 r
i
g
h
8.1.1 Safetying .....................................................................................................................130 t
_
F
o
8.1.2 Torque .........................................................................................................................131 o
t
e
r
8.1.3 Washers ......................................................................................................................131 V
_
N
9 Directives specific to MP Illustrations ...............................................................................132 a
t
c
o
9.1 Item identification .............................................................................................................132 _
B
o
x
9.2 Rules for Revised Illustrations Applicable for All Aircraft Programs ..................................133 1
V
_
9.3 Specific Rules for A330 Beluga XL Illustrations ................................................................133 N
a
t
c
9.4 Rule for Sharklets/Wingtips ..............................................................................................133 o
_
B
o
9.4.1 Rule for A320 family illustrations: Sharklets / Wingtips ................................................133 x
1
a
9.4.2 Rule for A330 family illustrations: Sharklets or Wingtips ..............................................134 V

_
N
a
10 FIN – Equipment (LRU), semi-equipment (LRI), and Circuit Breaker ................................135 t

c
o
_
10.1 FIN Definition ...................................................................................................................135 B

o
x
2
10.2 Generic FINs: ...................................................................................................................136 V

_
N
10.3 Aircraft Component Data Base (ACDB) ............................................................................136 a

t
c
o
10.4 General overview of circuit breaker management.............................................................137 _

B
o
x
10.4.1 865 subtask type .........................................................................................................137 2

a
10.4.2 Specific case: 875 subtask type...................................................................................138 _

N
a
t
c
10.5 Circuit Breakers in the Text ..............................................................................................139 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
11 Specific directives for scheduled maintenance tasks (MPD tasks) ...................................143 _

D
o
c
11.1 MPD Definition and Scope ...............................................................................................143 _

C
o
p
y
11.1.1 MPD Definition for all aircraft programs except for A330 Beluga XL ............................143 r
i
g
h
11.1.2 MPD Definition for A330 Beluga XL .............................................................................145 t
_
F
o
11.2 MPD task definition ..........................................................................................................145 o
t
e
r
11.3 Correspondence table between the MPD task code and the AMM function code .............146 V
_
N
11.4 General Rules for MPD Tasks ..........................................................................................147 a
t
c
o
11.4.1 Reason for the Job ......................................................................................................147 _
B
o
x
11.4.2 Job Set-up ...................................................................................................................147 1
V
_
11.4.3 Procedure ....................................................................................................................148 N
a
t
c
11.4.4 MPD Rules: .................................................................................................................149 o
_
B
o
11.5 Deletion of MPD tasks ......................................................................................................149 x
1
a
11.6 Specific rules for MPD tasks with EWIS (Electrical Wiring Interconnection System) .........152 V
_
N
a
11.7 MPD Task Applicability.....................................................................................................154 t

c
o
_
11.8 Rule for MPD tasks with a scheduled replacement...........................................................155 B

o
x
2
11.9 Rule for MPD tasks associated to the ALS Part 2 document (ALI beyond Maintenance PPT)156 V
_
N
12 Rules for Cabin ATA Chapter Tasks.................................................................................158 a

t
c
o
13 Cargo Loading System (CLS) content definition ...............................................................159 _

B
o
x
14 Directives Specific to Cabin and Cargo Access Panels ....................................................165 2

a
14.1 General ............................................................................................................................165 _

N
a
t
c
14.2 Rules .............................................................................................................................165 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
14.2.1 Rule for Steps..............................................................................................................166 _

D
o
c
14.2.2 Rules for the Illustration ...............................................................................................167 _

C
o
p
y
15 Page Block 201 Maintenance Practices ...........................................................................168 r
i
g
h
15.1 General ............................................................................................................................168 t
_
F
o
15.2 Text .............................................................................................................................168 o
t
e
r
15.3 Illustrations .......................................................................................................................168 V
_
N
15.4 Layout .............................................................................................................................169 a
t
c
o
15.4.1 Title of the Page Block and Tasks ...............................................................................169 _
B
o
x
15.4.2 Ground Support Equipment Specification ....................................................................169 1
V
_
15.4.3 Reason for the job .......................................................................................................169 N
a
t
c
15.4.4 Job Set-Up Information ................................................................................................170 o
_
B
o
15.4.5 Job Set-up ...................................................................................................................170 x
1
a
15.4.6 Procedure ....................................................................................................................170 V

_
N
a
15.4.7 Close-up ......................................................................................................................171 t

c
o
_
16 Page Block 301 Servicing ................................................................................................172 B

o
x
2
16.1 General ............................................................................................................................172 V

_
N
16.2 Text and Illustrations ........................................................................................................172 a

t
c
o
16.3 Layout .............................................................................................................................172 _

B
o
x
16.3.1 Title of the Page Block and Tasks ...............................................................................172 2

a
16.3.2 Breakdown of Servicing Task ......................................................................................173 _

N
a
t
c
17 Page Block 401 Removal / Installation .............................................................................175 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
17.1 General ............................................................................................................................175 _

D
o
c
17.2 Text .............................................................................................................................177 _

C
o
p
y
17.3 Illustrations .......................................................................................................................177 r
i
g
h
17.4 Different Types of Page Blocks 401 .................................................................................177 t
_
F
o
17.4.1 Page Block Covering a Single Component ..................................................................177 o
t
e
r
17.4.1.1 TASK Title ...................................................................................................................177 V
_
N
17.4.1.2 WARNINGS/CAUTIONS .............................................................................................178 a
t
c
o
17.4.2 Reason for the Job ......................................................................................................179 _
B
o
x
17.4.2.1 Job Set-up Information ................................................................................................179 1
V
_
17.4.2.2 Job Set-up ...................................................................................................................179 N
a
t
c
17.4.2.3 Procedure ....................................................................................................................179 o
_
B
o
17.4.2.4 Close-up ......................................................................................................................180 x
1
a
17.4.3 Breakdown of Installation Task ....................................................................................180 V

_
N
a
17.4.3.1 TASK Title ...................................................................................................................180 t

c
o
_
17.4.3.2 WARNINGS/CAUTIONS .............................................................................................180 B

o
x
2
17.4.3.3 Reason for the Job ......................................................................................................180 V

_
N
17.4.3.4 Job Set-up Information ................................................................................................180 a

t
c
o
17.4.3.5 Job Set-up ...................................................................................................................181 _

B
o
x
17.4.3.6 Procedure ....................................................................................................................181 2

a
17.4.3.6.1 Preparation of a Replacement Component ........................................................181 _

N
a
t
c
17.4.3.6.2 Preparation for Installation .................................................................................182 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
17.4.3.6.3 Preparation for Test (As applicable)...................................................................183 _

D
o
c
17.4.3.6.4 Test: ..................................................................................................................183 _

C
o
p
y
17.4.3.7 Close-up ......................................................................................................................184 r
i
g
h
17.5 Page Block Covering Two or Several Identical Components ............................................185 t
_
F
o
17.5.1 Title of the Page Block .................................................................................................185 o
t
e
r
17.5.2 Task Title .....................................................................................................................185 V
_
N
17.5.3 Removal TASK 1 .........................................................................................................185 a
t
c
o
17.5.4 Removal TASK 2 .........................................................................................................185 _
B
o
x
17.5.5 Removal Task 3...........................................................................................................186 1
V
_
17.5.6 Installation Tasks .........................................................................................................186 N
a
t
c
17.6 Page Block covering an MPD Replacement Task ............................................................187 o
_
B
o
17.7 Page Block covering a Part-of-Component Replacement .................................................188 x
1
a
17.8 Deactivation / Reactivation Tasks ....................................................................................189 V

_
N
a
17.8.1 Layout of a Deactivation Task......................................................................................191 t

c
o
_
17.8.1.1 Deactivation task number ............................................................................................191 B

o
x
2
17.8.1.2 Deactivation Task Title ................................................................................................191 V

_
N
17.8.1.3 General deactivation WARNINGS/CAUTIONS, ...........................................................191 a

t
c
o
17.8.1.4 Reason for the Job: consists of the MMEL/CDL Task title item ....................................192 _
B
o
x
17.8.1.5 Job set-up information .................................................................................................194 2

a
17.8.1.6 Job set-up....................................................................................................................194 _

N
a
t
c
17.8.1.7 Procedure ....................................................................................................................194 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
17.8.1.8 Close-up. .....................................................................................................................196 _

D
o
c
17.8.2 Layout of a reactivation Task .......................................................................................198 _

C
o
p
y
17.8.2.1 Reactivation task number ............................................................................................198 r
i
g
h
17.8.2.2 Reactivation TASK title ................................................................................................198 t
_
F
o
17.8.2.3 General reactivation WARNINGS/CAUTIONS, refer to Warnings/Cautions on Airbus People / Airbus Supply 198 o
t
e
r
17.8.2.3.1 Reason for the job: ............................................................................................198 V
_
N
17.8.2.3.2 Job set-up information: ......................................................................................198 a
t
c
o
17.8.2.3.3 Job set-up:.........................................................................................................198 _
B
o
x
17.8.2.3.4 Procedure: .........................................................................................................198 1
V
_
17.8.2.3.5 Close-up : ..........................................................................................................198 N
a
t
c
17.8.3 Illustration ....................................................................................................................200 o
_
B
o
17.8.4 Flying/Deactivation Parts .............................................................................................201 x
1
a
17.8.4.1 Rule for the Flying/Deactivation Parts ..........................................................................201 V

_
N
a
17.8.4.2 Rule for Illustration of Flying/Deactivation Parts ...........................................................201 t

c
o
_
17.8.5 Deactivation / Reactivation task not linked to MMEL or AFM – CDL item ....................202 B
o
x
2
17.9 Page Blocks Related to Cabin BFE and Cabin Monument Disassembly/Assembly ..........203 V
_
N
18 Page Block 501 Adjustment / Test ...................................................................................206 a

t
c
o
18.1 General ............................................................................................................................206 _

B
o
x
18.2 Text .............................................................................................................................206 2

a
18.3 Illustrations .......................................................................................................................206 _

N
a
t
c
18.4 Layout .............................................................................................................................207 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
18.4.1 Breakdown of an Adjustment Task ..............................................................................207 _

D
o
c
18.4.1.1 Task Title .....................................................................................................................207 _

C
o
p
y
18.4.1.2 General Adjustment WARNINGS/CAUTIONS .............................................................208 r
i
g
h
18.4.1.3 Reason for the Job ......................................................................................................208 t
_
F
o
18.4.1.4 Job Set-up Information ................................................................................................208 o
t
e
r
18.4.1.5 Job Set-up ...................................................................................................................208 V
_
N
18.4.1.6 Procedure ....................................................................................................................209 a
t
c
o
18.4.1.7 Close-up ......................................................................................................................209 _
B
o
x
18.4.2 Breakdown of Test Tasks ............................................................................................210 1
V
_
18.4.2.1 Task Title .....................................................................................................................211 N
a
t
c
18.4.2.2 General Test WARNINGS/CAUTIONS ........................................................................211 o
_
B
o
18.4.2.3 Reason for the Job ......................................................................................................211 x
1
a
18.4.2.4 Job Set-up Information ................................................................................................212 V

_
N
a
18.4.2.5 Job Set-up ...................................................................................................................212 t

c
o
_
18.4.2.6 Procedure ....................................................................................................................212 B

o
x
2
18.4.2.7 Close-up ......................................................................................................................216 V

_
N
19 Page Block 601 Inspection / Check ..................................................................................217 a

t
c
o
19.1 General ............................................................................................................................217 _

B
o
x
19.2 Text and Illustrations ........................................................................................................219 2

a
19.2.1 Text .............................................................................................................................219 _

N
a
t
c
19.2.2 Illustration ....................................................................................................................220 o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
c
o Airbus Amber
A
_

a
t
c
UG2100280.3
_
C
o
Issue: D
d
e
19.3 Layout .............................................................................................................................221 _

D
o
c
19.3.1 Title of the Page Block .................................................................................................221 _

C
o
p
y
19.3.2 Breakdown of Inspection / Check Task ........................................................................221 r
i
g
h
20 Page Block 701 Cleaning / Painting .................................................................................223 t
_
F
o
20.1 General ............................................................................................................................223 o
t
e
r
20.2 Text and illustration ..........................................................................................................223 V
_
N
20.3 Layout .............................................................................................................................223 a
t
c
o
20.3.1 Title of the Page Block .................................................................................................223 _
B
o
x
20.3.2 Breakdown of Cleaning / Painting Task .......................................................................223 1
V
_
21 Page Block 801 Approved Repairs ...................................................................................226 N
a
t
c
21.1 General ............................................................................................................................226 o
_
B
o
21.2 Text and illustrations ........................................................................................................226 x
1
a
21.3 Layout .............................................................................................................................227 V

_
N
a
21.3.1 Title of the Page Block .................................................................................................227 t

c
o
_
21.3.2 Breakdown of approved repairs Task ..........................................................................227 B

o
x
2
22 Referenced Documents....................................................................................................229 V
_
N
23 Glossary...........................................................................................................................231 a
t
c
o
Approvers .............................................................................................................................237 _
B
o
x
Record of Revisions ....................................................................................................................238 2

a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_
Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part UG2100280.3 N

a
t
c
(Page Blocks 201 to 899) Issue: D o

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
1 How to Read this User Guide (UG)? c

_
C
o
p
y
r
i
In this User Guide (UG), the authoring rules are highlighted in blue, the notes are highlighted g
h
in green, the AMM (Aircraft Maintenance Manual) task examples are highlighted in grey and t
_
F
the changes compared to the previous UG revision are mentioned by a revision bar on the left o
o
t
side of the page. e
r
V
_
NOTE: All the examples given in this guide are only intended to help users understand the N
a
t
authoring rules related to the relevant topics. c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
© AIRBUS SAS 2022. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY DOCUMENT. x
4
Printed Copies are not controlled. Confirm this is the latest issue available through the Hub. Page 16 of 241 V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
2 Introduction
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
The purpose of this document is to give the general policy for the authoring of Maintenance p
y
Procedures (MP) in compliance with the ATA iSpec 2200. r

i
g
h
t
_
Non-essential information that does not improve understanding must be avoided. F
o
o
t
e
For information about the Airbus Technical Data products and Deliverables, refer to C@dets. r
V
_
N
When a rule is added or updated in this guide, it is applicable to new tasks and revised a
t
c
(existing) tasks. o
_
B
o
x
“Latest rules” mean the application of Simplified Technical English and of the new and updated 1
rules from the latest issue of the authoring and illustration guides. _
N
a
t
c
o
For revised (existing) tasks, the latest rules must be applied only: _
B
o
x
1
● When these tasks are revised for other reasons (such as new Modification (MPM), a
V
Service Bulletin (SB), TechRequest). _
N
a
t
c
● On the variant(s) impacted by the change. o
_
B
o
x
Existing tasks must not be revised for the sole purpose of applying a new or updated rule 2
unless the product leader specifically requests it. _

N
a
t
c
o
For the revised tasks related to a TDVV discrepancy correction or to a DISCR event, the latest _
B
rules must be only applied if specific instructions have to be incorporated in the task. It is not o
x
2
necessary to apply these rules when the change only consists in changing a tagged data a
V
reference or the configuration of the task/subtask. _
N
a
t
c
If parts of the text or illustration are reused (copied/pasted) from an existing documentary unit o
_
B
(SD or MP) to create a new documentary unit, they must be put in line with the latest rules in o
x
2
the new documentary unit. b
V
_
N
For revised tasks, if the technical change has an impact on the text only but not on the a
t
c
illustration, it is not requested to update the illustration to the latest rules. o
_
B
o
x
For subtasks/illustrations that are set to equivalence, they are not supposed to be adapted to 3
V
the latest rules. _
N
a
t
c
For a new illustration (even if the content is copied from another existing illustration), the o
_
B
content must be compliant with the latest rules. o
x
3
a
For a revised illustration with one single sheet, if there are technical changes, the figure V
_
N
solution must be compliant with the latest rules. a
t
c
o
For a revised illustration with multi-sheets: _

B
o
x
● If less than 50% of the sheets are impacted by the technical change, only the impacted 3
b
sheets must be compliant with the latest rules. V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
● If 50% or more sheets are impacted by the technical change, all the sheets must be _
D
o
compliant with the latest rules. c

_
C
o
● A mix of rules on a given sheet is forbidden. p

y
r
i
● An existing illustration must never be changed back to the previous rules. g

h
t
_
For more information about revised illustrations, refer to paragraph 10 Directives specific to F
o
o
MP Illustrations. t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
3 General Policy Applicable to Maintenance Tasks

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
3.1 Interchangeability y
r
i
g
h
t
If a Part Number (P/N) A is considered by the Design Office as interchangeable with a P/N B, it means _
F
that there is no impact on the Aircraft maintenance documentation. The related AMM tasks remain the o
o
t
same. e
r
V
_
N
RULE: a
t
c
o
It is not allowed to introduce P/N in the AMM to manage interchangeability issue. In case of such _
B
request, contact the Product Leader for a final decision. o

x
1
V
_
N
3.2 Customer Originated Changes (COC) a

t
c
o
_
COCs are customer property. The content is under the responsibility of the customer. B
o
It is not allowed to modify the content of a COC without customer agreement. x

1
a
If a technical change from Airbus has an impact in the COC content, the central COC team must be V
_
contacted through the generic address of the COC Central Team in Hamburg td.coc-cabin- N
a
t
cargo@airbus.com to know if it is allowed to modify the related AMM task. c
o
The COC processing is described in the Work Description WD1504197. _

B
o
x
2
RULE: V
_
N
a
It is forbidden to modify a COC task if it is not contractually requested by the customer. t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3.3 Repairs, Allowable Damage and Flight Allowance 2
a
V
_
N
a
3.3.1 General Rules t
c
o
_
Repairs are any operation to fix a damage that deviates from the approved design. B
o
x
Allowable damage is any task or step of task giving a tolerance on a damage dimension or a flight 2
b
allowance in Flight Hours (FH) or Flight Cycles (FC). V

_
N
a
t
EXAMPLES: c
o
“The crack must not be more than 2.5 mm” or

_
B
o
“The pipe must be replaced after 50 FC”.

x
3
V
_
N
RULES: a
t
c
o
● All repairs, allowable damage and flight allowance must be approved with a Generic Repair _
B
o
Design Approval Sheet (GRDAS) as per M20647 (How to initiate and request a generic repair x
3
a
design approval sheet for repair solutions in AMM/MP/CMM/ESPM/DFPRM). This process is V
applicable even if the request for incorporation comes from a supplier (the nacelle suppliers _
N
a
included). t
c
o
_
● It is not allowed to provide advance copies/temporary revisions or release the task before the B
o
x
GRDAS is signed and attached to the related Authoring Work Order (AWO). 3
b
● The time frame for the flight allowance must be indicated in Flight Cycles (FC), Flight Hours V
_
(FH) or Months (MO) only. This change was done for giving more flexibility to the operators N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
for organizing their scheduled maintenance planning and for defining the content of these _
D
o
checks. c
_
It is no longer allowed to mention the “check” (A-check or C-check). If an A-check or C-check

C
● o
p
y
is mentioned in an AMM task, you must request the Design Office to provide the equivalent r
i
interval in FC/FH/MO. g
h
t
● If a Component Maintenance Manual (CMM) from a supplier is used as source data to _

F
o
publish an allowable damage or repair in the AMM, a GRDAS is mandatory even if they have o
t
e
published and approved the repair under their own Design Organization Approval (DOA). r
● For the Engine chapters, we need to have evidence of the approval from the engine supplier V
_
N
before we can publish the data as Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness (ICA) in the a
t
c
AMM. o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
3.3.2 GRDAS workflow N

a
t
c
o
The Repair Solution Requestor (RSR) is the person requesting the incorporation or the update of a _
B
o
generic repair task, an allowable damage or a flight allowance in the AMM (most of the time, the x
1
requestor is the Design Office or the Engineering Support). a
The requestor performs the main role in the workflow. _

N
a
He has to create the request for updating the concerned aircraft maintenance documentation through t
c
o
the TechRequest tool and attach the released source data necessary for the authoring and the _
B
approval of the generic repair solution in the TechRequest dossier. o

x
2
V
_
N
a
t
The compliance of the TechRequest Dossier is checked by the Technical Data Engineer (TDE). c
o
If the TechRequest is compliant, the TDE will author the generic repair solution in the AMM and will _
B
o
do these actions: x
2
● Ask the Business Ops to add the “GRDAS” follow-up attribute to the TechRequest. The
a
V
_
Design Office Verification (DOV) and DOA steps will be automatically selected in the related N
a
AWO. t
c
o
● Create the associated AWO _

B
● Launch the authoring of the generic repair solution

o
x
2
● Ensure that the appropriate steps of verification and validation of the generic repair solution
b
are performed (Proofreading, Incoming Inspection and DOV are mandatory, On-Aircraft _
N
a
Validation (OAV) if applicable) t

c
● Send the request for approval of the generic repair solution to the Design Airworthiness
o
_
B
o
Engineer (DAE) through the Design Organization Approval (DOA) step. x
3
● If the incorporation or the update of a generic repair task, an allowable damage or a flight V
_
allowance in the AMM is sent by a supplier (including the nacelle suppliers) who has no access N
a
t
to the TechRequest application, this way of working must be applied: c
o
o The “GRDAS” follow-up attribute must be added to the criteria if there is a specific
_
B
o
criteria to update the AMM task. Then, the DOV and DOA steps will be automatically x
3
a
selected in the related AWO. V

_
o If there is no specific criteria to update the AMM task, the author/TDE must manually N
a
t
select the DOV and DOA steps in the related AWO. c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
Refer to the following diagrams: o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
DO F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
DO: Design Office V
DOV: Design Office Verification _

N
a
1IAZE: Repair Airworthiness organization t

c
o
FC: Flight Cycles _
B
o
FH: Flight Hours x
2
ICS: Independent Certification Sheet a
SII: Support Engineering _

N
a
SRM: Structural Repair Manual t
c
o
TA: Technical Adaptation _
B
TN: Technical Note o

x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
Newly Added o
3.4 Standalone Changes p

y
r
i
g
Due to the new EASA requirement 21.A.90C, the ICA standalones changes (not covered by a h
t
design change such as a modification or Service Bulletin), requires: _

F
o
● Airworthiness Limitation Sections (ALS) standalones to be formally classified and o

t
e
airworthiness approved. This is already the case since ALS are basically included in the r
V
Type Design; _
N
● Non-ALS standalone changes to be formally classified and airworthiness approved. a

t
c
Some parts of the ICA require an additional certification exercise. o

_
B
o
x
1
There are two main families of Non-ALS ICA Standalone Changes requiring a specific airworthiness V
_
approval (GRDAS or formal EASA approval): N

a
t
● Changes to replace a given ICA Product: The use of a novelty to replace an existing ICA c
o
_
B
Product. o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
●
o
Changes to update an existing ICA Product: some typical examples are provided in this p
y
r
table: i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
3.5 Concessions D
o
c
_
C
RULE: o
p
y
r
i
g
When a concession impacts the AMM: h
t
_
●
F
The content of a concession must not be duplicated in the AMM. o
o
● A new solution must be created for the aircraft under concession (using the concession as a t
e
r
configuration criteria) but the original content must be kept. V

_
● Only the reference of the concession(s) must be added in a step so that the original values as N
a
t
per design are still available. c
o
If you are requested to deviate from this rule, contact your product leader. _
B
o
x
1
EXAMPLE (for the original subtask variant): V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
EXAMPLE (for the new subtask variant applicable to the aircraft under x
2
concession): V
_
N
a
t
c
(2) If you install a new movable fairing (1), do the steps that follow: o
_
(a) On the inboard side of the movable fairing (1), do the steps that follow: B
o
x
1_ Turn the inboard threaded bush (60) to adjust the step dimension ‘A’ between the 2
a
movable fairing (1) and the fixed fairing (58). V

_
2_ Make sure that step dimension ‘A’ is 5.0 -5/+5 mm (0.2 -0.20/+0.20 in.). N
a
t
3_ If step dimension ‘A’ is not in the given tolerances, refer to concessions TB-005136269 c
o
_
and TB-005137586 for the step dimension ‘A’ value. B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
3.6 Independent/Double Inspection o

x
3
V
RULE: _
N
It is not allowed to request a double inspection or an independent inspection in a maintenance task. a

t
c
It is the operator’s responsibility to determine such need. o
_
B
o
x
3
a
3.7 Maintenance Personnel Qualification & Skills V
_
N
RULE: a
t
c
It is not allowed to indicate the required qualification or skills for the maintenance personnel in a o
_
B
maintenance task. o
x
It is the operator’s responsibility to determine such need. 3

b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
3.8 Maintenance Human Error Analysis (MHEA) D
o
c
_
C
To know if a recommendation from the Maintenance Human Error Analysis (MHEA) can be accepted o
p
y
and incorporated in the AMM, please refer to the MHEA Way of working in Technical Data - r
i
g
WD1601860 appendix A. h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
3.9 Language to be used in Maintenance Tasks N

a
t
c
Any task/subtask must be written using ASD Simplified Technical English (Specification ASD- o
_
B
STE100). o
x
1
For more information refer to ASD-STE100 Simplified Technical English. V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3.10 Typical Sentences 1

a
When the same sentence is used frequently, it is recommended to create a Typical Sentence if it does _
N
a
not already exist in the DACAS Typical Sentence database. t

c
o
This makes sure that the sentence is always written in the same way. _
B
o
x
2
Typical sentences are managed in dedicated databases in DACAS to ensure consistency and avoid V
_
typing errors. Typical sentences are submitted to a linguistic check by the Airbus linguistic specialists N
a
t
before they include them in the dedicated databases. These databases are available on the Linguistics c
o
_
and Illustrations platform. B
o
x
2
a
Typical Sentences must be written in accordance with the authoring rules applicable to the product V
_
they are created for. N
a
t
c
o
The Typical Sentences are called up from the DACAS table using the Typical Sentence tag. _
B
o
x
2
b
If a Typical Sentence is missing from the DACAS table, send a request to the Typical Sentence V
_
database administrator (Refer to PRD0051.0 and use the UG1800601 form). N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
3.11 Highlight D
o
c
_
C
o
p
3.11.1 Definition y
r
i
g
The highlight is provided to the customer to describe the change in the technical data. Highlights are h
t
_
used by operators to assess the impacts of the changes on their maintenance operation and decide F
o
o
if they have to regenerate their job cards. t
e
r
There are two types of highlights: _

N
a
t
● Automatic Highlight (DALI): This highlight is generated during the finalization by Data c
o
_
Assembly LIne (DALI). It consists in a comparison of the content between the current B
o
x
SGML content and the SGML content of the previous revision. 1
●
V
Manual Highlight: This highlight is generated by the author to describe the reason for _
N
change. a
t
c
CAUTION: The automatic highlight does not replace the manual highlight. o
_
B
o
The manual highlight is created in the iPPE tree of DACAS by the authors at task or subtask x
1
a
level to describe the reason for change (Ref. UG1500229.1). V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
3.11.2 Rules V
_
N
a
The manual highlight is mandatory for any change: any creation or new variant validated or any t
c
o
modified documentary object (such as Description, Task, Subtask, Figure). _
B
o
x
2
RULES: a
V
o The highlight must be compliant with the specification ASD-STE100 (AeroSpace _
N
a
and Defense Industries Association of Europe - Simplified Technical English). It is t
c
recommended to start with a verb in the past tense. o

_
B
o
x
2
o The highlight must give a precise description of all the changes made in the b
V
technical data content. This is to allow the operator to assess the impact of the _
N
change on the aircraft maintenance activity. The highlight must make a a

t
c
comparison between the previous revision and the current one. o

_
B
Examples: o
x
● “Corrected Torque Value from…to…”.

3
● “Deleted MPD 274100-02-1 reference from the Reason for the job.” _
N
a
● “Moved step “…” to the start of the subtask”. t

c
o
● “Replaced the BITE test of the… by the Operational test of the….” _
B
o
x
3
o In the case of improvement of the wording in a task or system description with no a
technical change, use this generic highlight "Updated the wording of the _
N
a
task/system description with no technical change". t
c
o
o
In the case of effectivity update of a task, subtask or system description with no _
B
technical change, use this generic highlight "Updated the task/system description o
x
3
with no technical change". b
V
o It is possible to detail more than one change in a highlight. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
o The highlight must not refer to a TechRequest or to a Modification/Proposal of _

D
o
Modification (MPM) or SB. c

_
C
o
p
o
y
When a highlight is applicable to the whole task or when several subtasks are r
i
revised for the same reason, the highlight must be given at task level. g
h
t
This will avoid showing the same highlight several times to the operators. _
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
3.12 Abbreviations/Acronyms D
o
c
_
Use only the acronyms contained in LEXINET (Ref. PP1800337 Airbus Reference Language). C
o
p
y
r
Definitions: i
g
h
Acronym: For Technical Data, acronym refers to abbreviations that are made up of the first letter of t
_
F
a group of words (e.g. WIPS for Wing Ice Protection System, APU for Auxiliary Power Unit, MLG for o
o
t
Main Landing Gear). Acronyms are usually used in the names of equipment or systems. e
r
V
_
Abbreviation: The shortened form of a word (e.g. ASSY for assembly, CAPT for Captain, BRK for N
a
t
brake). c
o
_
B
o
RULES: x
1
● The acronyms must be developed the first time they are used (in the task title or in the text). V
_
N
Give the developed form first followed by the acronym between brackets. a
t
c
For example: o
_
o Operational Test of the Wing Ice Protection System (WIPS) B

o
x
o Removal of the Air Data and Inertial Reference Unit (ADIRU). 1

a
V
_
●
N
Do not use abbreviations in an instruction. For example, write: a
t
o Circuit breaker and not C/B, c

o
_
o Aircraft and not A/C, B

o
x
o Pushbutton switch and not P/BSW, 2
o Forward and not FWD.

V
_
N
Abbreviations approved in Lexinet can be used on illustrations, but only when there is not a
t
c
enough space for the full form on the illustration. o

_
B
o
x
● Do not develop the abbreviations of units of measurement when they follow a value such as: 2
a
o
_
28VDC, N
a
o 10 m.daN, t
c
o
o 3000 psi. _
B
o
x
2
b
● Do not develop these abbreviations/acronyms that are commonly used in the aviation V
_
industry: N
a
⮚ AC
t
Alternating Current c
o
⮚ APU
_
Auxiliary Power Unit B
o
⮚ BITE
x
Built-in Test Equipment 3
⮚ CAPT
V
Captain _
N
⮚ CDS
a
Control and Display System t

c
o
⮚ DC Direct Current _
B
o
⮚ ECAM Electronic Centralized Aircraft Monitoring x

3
a
⮚ EFIS Electronic Flight Instrument system V

_
⮚ F/O
N
First Officer a
t
⮚ GPS
c
Global Positioning System o
_
⮚ HF
B
High Frequency o
x
⮚ HP
3
High Pressure b
⮚ LCD
V
Liquid Crystal Display _
N
⮚ LED
a
Light Emitting Diode t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
⮚
_
LP Low Pressure D
o
⮚
c
MLG Main Landing Gear _
C
⮚
o
ND Navigation Display p
y
⮚
r
NLG Nose Landing Gear i
g
⮚
h
PFD Primary Flight Display t
_
⮚
F
SATCOM Satellite Communication o

o
⮚
t
SD System Display e
r
⮚ USB Universal Serial Bus V

_
N
⮚ VHF Very High Frequency a

t
c
⮚ VOR VHF Omnidirectional Range o

_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
3.13 Deletion or Non Publication of a Task a

t
c
o
_
B
RULES: o
x
1
a
● A task can be set to “Not published” only in case of: V

_
● Safety or critical conditions (the AMM task will be reviewed and published again)
N
a
t
● Deletion of an MPD task (Refer to Paragraph 11.5)

c
o
_
● For any other case, you must contact the Product Leader to have the agreement to set B
o
x
a task to “Not published”. 2
●
V
A task can be deleted in case of : _
N
○ Incorrect task function code

a
t
c
○ Incorrect 6-digit ATA reference o

_
B
○ New structure in a 4-digit ATA breakdown o

x
● Before you delete or set a task to “Not published” status,

2
a
○ Make sure that another task does not refer to this task. You can use the DACAS
V
_
N
transaction Z_DACASHANA_Q10B to identify the tasks referring to the task to be a

t
c
deleted. o
_
○ Then, for each of these tasks, you must inform the applicable TDEs that the referenced
B
o
x
2
task will be deleted. b
○ You must also provide the TDEs with the new task reference when applicable. V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
4 AMM general structure

_
D
o
c
_
The MP provides the necessary instructions and data to enable the maintenance staff to maintain C
o
p
the aircraft in a safe and serviceable condition and to assure its continued Airworthiness. y
r
i
g
h
The data contained in an MP provides: t

_
F
o
o
t
● Maintenance Planning Document (MPD) Tasks e
r
● Deactivation/Reactivation tasks to cover MMEL/CDL V

_
● Removal/Installation of LRUs, LRIs N

a
t
● Tasks called up by the TSM c

o
_
B
o
x
Other tasks as necessary (Cleaning, Servicing, Inspection / Check: after abnormal operation of the 1
aircraft) V
_
N
The MPs are described in the AMM by the following Page Blocks: a
t
c
o
_
● 02: Maintenance Practices (General task for safety precautions, while working on B
o
x
hydraulics, wings) 1
a
● 03: Servicing (gives information on all operations with fluids: Fuel, Gas, Oil, Water, V
_
N
Sanitary fluids) a
t
● 04: Removal/Installation and Deactivation/Reactivation c

o
_
● 05: Adjustment/Test B
o
x
● 06: Inspection/Check 2
●
V
07: Cleaning/Painting _
N
● 08: Approved Repairs (seals, coatings, damaged flanks of gear, painted areas, a
t
c
repairs of cabin parts) o

_
B
o
x
2
a
4.1 Page Block structure V

_
N
a
t
c
A Page Block must include the following: o

_
B
o
x
●
2
Title of the Page Block b
● Task(s) broken down into subtasks. V

_
N
a
t
c
o
4.1.1 Title of the page block _

B
o
x
3
The title is that indicated in the Airbus ATA REF database. V
For more information, Refer to PRD0002.0 Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM) and Air- _
N
a
Vehicle Maintenance (AM) Product Definition. t

c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
4.1.2 Task Title D
o
c
_
The task title must reflect the job described in the task. C
o
The task title must start with the subject of the function code followed by the “name of the
p
y
r
system or subsystem or sub-subsystem or component or subject of the task” as applicable. i

g
h
t
_
F
If the task title contains acronyms (from functional designations or ATA breakdown), give the o
o
t
developed form first (Refer to Para. 3.11 Abbreviations/Acronyms). e
r
V
_
If the functional designation contains abbreviations, do not use the abbreviations but write N
a
t
the full form, such as “Assembly” instead of “ASSY”. c
o
_
B
o
x
If the title is too long for the DACAS field, contact the related Tech Data Engineer (TDE). 1
V
_
N
a
RULES: t
c
o
● Capitalize the first letter of each word in a title, except of: for, on, at, in, and, or, to, a, _
B
o
an, the. x
1
a
Examples: V
● Flight Configuration Precautions Without Electrical Power _

N
a
● Engine Preparation Before Borescope Inspection t
c
● Lubrication of the Cargo Doors

o
_
B
● Airnav displays the task invariant title. So the task invariant title must be as generic as o
x
2
possible to cover the task solution titles. V

_
● The task title must not contain special characters such as °C, °F, >, +, =, &…. because N
a
t
Airnav on-board only accepts alphanumeric characters in the task title. Special c
o
_
characters must be replaced by their developed form. B
o
x
2
a
V
_
RULE FOR A330 Beluga XL (BXL): N
a
● All AMM tasks applicable only to Beluga XL aircraft must include “(BXL)” at the end of t
c
o
the title. _
B
o
● For the tasks specific to the Courier Area documentation authored by Airbus Interior x
2
b
Systems (AIS), the task title must include "(BXL - Courier Area Suplemental Type V
Certificate (STC))” at the end of the title.

_
N
a
t
c
o
RULE for all aircraft programs: _

B
o
For scheduled maintenance tasks, the AMM task title must be identical to the Maintenance x
3
Review Board Report (MRBR) / Airworthiness Limitation Section (ALS) or MPD task title. V
_
N
However the title can be adapted in the following cases: a
t
● If the title is too long (tool limitation on the number of available characters). c
o
_
For example, an abbreviation can be used instead of the full designation of an B
o
x
equipment (refer to Lexinet for approved abbreviations) or add three full stops at the 3
a
end of the title. V

_
● If there are differences in the title of the variants of the MPD task, the AMM task title N
a
t
must be adapted to be more generic. c
o
o One task for Left Hand (LH) side and the other task for Right Hand (RH) side),
_
B
o
x
the AMM task title must not mention the side. 3
b
o Some configuration management is done in the MPD variant titles (for V

_
example, area of bearings 1 to 7 and area of bearings 1 to 8), the AMM task N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
title must not mention the number of bearings, frames. But the AMM content _
D
o
must manage the different configurations of inspection area. c

_
o The additional indications such as “As far as visible”, “if …installed” must not
C
o
p
y
be shown in the AMM task title. r
i
● For the special detailed inspections, the type of NDT inspection (US, HFEC,…) must g
h
t
be removed from the AMM task title and must not be mentioned in the task _
F
o
● When a part number reference or supplier name is indicated in the MPD description, o
t
e
it must be removed from the AMM task title. r
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
o
_
B
TASK 32-42-00-210-801-A o
x
General Visual Inspection of Brake Packs for Hydraulic Leaks 1
V
_
N
a
1. Reason for the Job t
c
o
MPD 324200-00001 _
B
GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF BRAKE PACKS FOR HYDRAULIC LEAKS o

x
1
a
V
When several tasks are covered in one Page Block, the title of each task must be identified by _
N
a
the description of the item concerned preceded by the task function. t
c
o
_
B
EXAMPLE: o
x
2
TASK 27-92-16-000-801-A V
_
Removal of the Rate Gyro Unit N
a
TASK 27-92-16-400-801-A t
c
o
Installation of the Rate Gyro Unit _

B
o
x
2
a
NOTE: V
A380 AirN@v on board transmits the task title in case of command to the Power Distribution _
N
a
Maintenance Interface (PDMI) or to the BITE. Today AirN@v on board only accepts t
c
alphanumeric characters. It does not accept special characters such as °C, °F, >, +, =, &.
o
_
B
For this reason, only alphanumeric characters are authorized in the task title. Special
o
x
2
characters must be replaced by a written understandable term. b
V
_
N
a
t
4.1.3 Subtask Title c

o
_
B
o
Each subtask is a level 2 paragraph that starts with a title. x
3
V
_
Rule: All the subtasks must have a title even if the subtask has only one action. This rule is N
a
t
not applicable to subtasks 865 and 875. c
o
_
B
o
The subtask title must be in the <subtask title> tag and capitalize the first letter of each word x
3
a
in a subtask title, except of: for, on, at, in, and, or, to, a, an, the. V
_
N
a
t
Usually, a title does not have a verb and does not have a full stop. Nevertheless, these Typical c
o
Sentences are exceptions and are acceptable even if they have a verb: _
B
o
● “Get Access” x
3
● “Close Access”
b
● “Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration.”

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Title for subtask 861: _

D
o
● Energization of the Electrical Network (SA: T211, LR: S022, A380: GEN186) c
_
C
Title for subtask 862: o
p
● De-Energization of the Electrical Network (SA: T212, LR: S023, A380: GEN187)
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
EXAMPLE: o
t
e
SUBTASK 34-71-11-740-XXX-A r
E. Test V
_
N
(1) Do the BITE test of the AESS (Master AESU TCAS/Transponder (XPDR) Test) Ref. a
t
c
AMM TASK 34-71-00-740-803. o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
4.1.4 Effectivity splitting c

o
_
B
o
Grouping of differences in tasks/descriptions due to effectivity (such as MPM, SB) must be x
1
limited only to their specific differences. a
V
_
N
●
a
For extensive effectivity differences and/or clarify, an additional Page Block with the t
c
o
same Air Transport Association of America (ATA) reference must be issued (new _
B
configuration). Deletion of a Configuration must not cause a change in sequence o

x
2
numbering of still valid Configurations. V

_
N
a
●
t
Minor effectivity differences are indicated at subtask level. Do not repeat common c
o
information on configured subtask level. _

B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
5 Task structure
_
D
o
c
_
GENERAL LAYOUT C
o
p
TASK Number y
r
i
TASK Title g
h
FIN: (FIN), (FIN),... t

_
F
WARNING: … o
o
t
CAUTION: … e
r
NOTE: ... V
_
1. Reason for the Job N

a
t
Used as necessary, but no input will default to "Self Explanatory". c

o
_
NOTE : B
o
x
Never input Self Explanatory because it is automatically generated during data assembly 1
(finalization). It may cause problem at finalization V

_
N
a
t
c
2. Job Set-Up Information o
_
B
This paragraph comes up at finalization with information found in the task such as tools, o
x
consumable material, references to other AMM Tasks or illustrations. 1

a
V
_
N
3. Job Set-Up a
t
c
Ref. Fig. o
_
WARNING: … B
o
x
CAUTION: … 2
V
NOTE: ... _
N
a
t
c
NOTE : o
_
B
The Ref. Fig, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE must always be entered in this order. o
x
2
a
V
Subtask Number _
N
A. Subtask Title a
t
c
(1) ................ o
_
B
(2) ................ o
x
2
Subtask Number b
B. Subtask Title V
_
N
(1) ................ a
t
c
(2) ................ o
_
B
o
x
NOTE : 3
The topics 3. “Job Set-Up” and 4. “Procedure” are mandatory. Topic 5. “Close-up” is _
N
a
optional. Consequently, it is necessary to fill in these topics even if there is nothing to t
c
o
do. In this case, use Subtask Function Code 941 and enter a sentence to precise that _
B
no particular action is required except to get access to working area. o

x
3
a
V
4. Procedure _
N
a
t
c
Ref. Fig. o
_
B
WARNING: … o
x
3
CAUTION: … b
V
NOTE: ... _
N
a
t
c
Subtask Number o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Subtask Title _
D
o
c
_
C
NOTE: o
p
y
All subtasks correspond to a level 2(A) Paragraph r
i
Ref. Fig. g
h
t
WARNING: …. _
F
CAUTION: ….
o
o
t
e
NOTE: .......... r
(1) ................ V
_
N
(2) ................ a
t
c
(a)......... o
_
B
1........ o
x
1
Subtask Number _
N
a
B. Subtask Title t
c
o
(1) ................ _
B
(2) ................ o
x
1
(3) Title .......... a
V
WARNING: _
N
a
................ t
c
(a) ............. o
_
B
(b) ............. o
x
2
NOTE: V
_
WARNING / CAUTION after work step (3) title will be applicable to work steps at level N
a
(3)(a) and (3)(b). t

c
o
_
B
o
5. Close-Up x
2
a
Subtask Title _
N
a
A. Subtask Title t
c
o
(1) ................ _
B
o
(2) ................ x
2
(3) ................ b
V
_
N
a
t
5.1 Zone c
o
_
B
o
RULE: It is mandatory to systematically tag the zone(s) in which the task is performed, at task level, x
3
in the zone table of the associated data in iPPE tree. V

_
N
a
t
NOTE: c
o
_
When the task concerns the whole aircraft (such as de-icing, inspection after hard landing), it is not B
o
necessary to tag the zone. x

3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.2 Reason for the job D
o
c
_
RULE: C
o
p
Never input Self Explanatory which is automatically generated when there is no Reason for the y
r
Job that is not mandatory i

g
h
t
_
F
o
RULE: o
t
e
MPD, CDL or MMEL references are the only “privileged data” permitted in the Reason for the r
V
Job. It is not allowed to refer to any other source (such as In-Service Information (ISI) article, _
N
a
Inspection Service Bulletin (SB)). t
c
For specific rules related to MPD, refer to Paragraph 13 Specific Directives for Scheduled o
_
B
Maintenance Tasks (MPD tasks) o
x
1
V
_
RULE: N
a
Only one type of reference (MPD, CDL or MMEL) is permitted in the “Reason for the Job” t
c
o
paragraph for a given task. _
B
o
x
1
a
RULE: V
When an AMM task comprises several method configuration tasks such as different _
N
a
tools/methods to energize/de-energize the aircraft, to pressurize/depressurize hydraulic t
c
o
systems or to do a given maintenance task, the "Reason for the Job" paragraph must include a _
B
o
Note highlighting the existence of alternative methods as follows: x
2
V
_
EXAMPLE: N
a
t
** ON A/C FSN ALL c
o
_
TASK 24-41-00-861-801-A01 B
o
Energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the APU (APU Started with APU BAT) x
2
a
V
_
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT ALL THE CIRCUITS IN MAINTENANCE ARE ISOLATED N
a
t
BEFORE YOU SUPPLY ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE AIRCRAFT. c
o
UNWANTED ELECTRICAL POWER CAN BE DANGEROUS. _

B
o
x
2
b
1. Reason for the Job V
_
NOTE: There are alternative methods for this task. This task gives one of the methods. For the N
a
other methods, refer to the other tasks in this Page Block. t

c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.2.1 Non-scheduled TASKS D
o
c
_
● Non-Specific: C
o
p
Useful information in complement to the Task title has to be added (for a test, it is necessary to clarify y
r
which elements are tested and in which purpose. i

g
h
t
_
F
EXAMPLE: o
o
t
e
r
TASK 21-26-00-720-801-A V
_
Functional test of the Avionics Ventilation System (AVS) Ducts N

a
t
1. Reason for the Job c
o
_
To make sure that there is no internal blockage or leakage in the blowing and extraction systems. B
o
A blockage or a leakage can decrease the airflow that is necessary for the ventilation of the avionics x
1
equipment. V
_
N
a
t
When the task title is sufficient and clear, the “Reason for the job” must be empty. “Self Explanatory”
c
o
_
will be automatically generated in the “Reason for the job” paragraph during production. B
o
x
1
a
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
a
t
TASK 32-31-13-000-803-A c
o
_
Removal of the BLG-Door Bypass Valve B

o
x
1. Reason for the Job 2
V
Self-explanatory _
N
a
t
c
RULE: o
_
B
The Task title must not be repeated in the “Reason for the job”. o
x
2
a
RULE: V
_
N
For MMEL/CDL (Minimum Master Equipment List/Component Deviation List), the MMEL/CDL a
t
c
identification number must be tagged in the “Reason for the Job”. o
_
B
o
x
RULE: 2
b
If several methods are available for the deactivation/reactivation (e.g. with high speed tape or with a V
_
N
solid cover), it is not allowed to do a method configuration. You must create different task invariants a
t
c
and tag the MMEL or CDL identification numbers in the relevant task. o
_
NOTE: The MMEL/CDL tool cannot manage method configurations. B

o
x
3
V
RULE: _
N
a
Tasks related to the MMEL/CDL must be in ATA XX-XX-00 PB04 with function codes 040/440. t
c
o
_
B
o
EXAMPLE: x
3
a
TASK 32-42-00-040-801 V
Deactivation of the Main Wheel Brake _

N
a

c
o
Refer to the MMEL TASK: 32-42-01 Normal Braking Main Wheels Brakes _
B
o
x
3
RULE: b
FAA specific requirement must be covered by an AMM Task. _

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
The reason for the job must refer to the MMEL item number (tag MMEL with Disponc-ID _
D
o
DXXXXX). c
_
C
If a task is specific to FAA MMEL, (FAA only) will automatically appear after the MMEL o
p
y
title. r
i
g
h
t
_
EXAMPLE: F
o
o
t
e
TASK 52-51-00-440-803 r
Reactivation of the Lock Function _

N
a
t
c
o
1. Reason for the Job _
B
Refer to the MMEL TASK: 52-50-02-1)b) DOORS - Fixed Interior Cockpit Door Locking System o
x
1
(CDLS) Cockpit Door Toggle Switch Lock Function ( FAA Only) V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.2.2 Scheduled TASKS D
o
c
_
> MPD (Maintenance Planning Document): C
o
p
y
r
These Tasks use the MPD identification number for Reason for the Job. i
g
h
t
_
F
RULE: o
o
The MPD reference must be tagged in the “Reason for the job”. t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
EXAMPLE: c
o
_
B
o
MPD identification number 275000-0014 (OPERATIONAL CHECK OF SFCC RESET SWITCHES) is x

1
related to the maintenance action in the MPD. V

_
N
a
t
c
TASK 27-54-00-710-803-A o
_
Operational Test of the Slat Flap Control-Computer (SFCC) Reset Switches (Flaps) B
o
x
1
a

_
N
MPD 275000-0014 a
t
OPERATIONAL CHECK OF SFCC RESET SWITCHES. c

o
_
This task is used to make sure that the reset functions of the SFCCs operate correctly. B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.2.3 Servicing Task D
o
c
_
C
o
p
5.2.3.1 For SA / LR y
r
i
g
For SA/LR, the system servicing tasks are in ATA chapter 12. h
t
The 5th and 6th digits of the ATA 12-22-XX corresponds to the system ATA.
_
F
o
o
t
e
EXAMPLE: r
V
_
N
a
TASK 12-22-32-640-00100 t
c
o
Lubrication of Main Landing Gear and Doors _
B
o
x
1

_
MPD 321000-01 N
a
t
LUBRICATION OF MAIN LANDING GEAR AND DOORS c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
5.2.3.2 For A380 V

_
N
a
For the A380 the servicing tasks are in their related ATA chapter. t
c
o
_
B
o
EXAMPLE: x
2
V
_
N
TASK 29-17-00-611-801-A a
t
c
Servicing of Air Hydraulic Seepage Bottles o
_
B
o
x

a
MPD 291000-00006 V
_
N
SERVICING OF AIR HHX SEEPAGE BOTTLES. a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.2.4 Component Weight D
o
c
_
C
o
p
5.2.4.1 Component Weight Warning y
r
i
g
h
RULE: t
_
F
o
o
t
If a component weight is more than 12 kg and it is necessary to remove/install the component during e
r
the task, the task must contain a specific Warning at task level: V
_
N
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE OR INSTALL THIS EQUIPMENT. THIS a

t
c
EQUIPMENT IS HEAVY (MORE THAN 12 KG (26.5 lb)) AND CAN CAUSE INJURY o
_
B
AND/OR DAMAGE. o
x
1
● For A320 Family, use Warning 3435 _

N
a
t
c
●
o
For A330/A340 program, use Warning 3434 _
B
o
x
1
● For A380 program, use Warning 1203 a
V
_
EXAMPLE: N
a
t
TASK 32-31-22-000-801-A c
o
_
Removal of the NLG Retraction Actuator B
o
x
2
FIN: 5201GA V
_
N
a
t
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE OR INSTALL THIS EQUIPMENT. THIS c

o
_
EQUIPMENT IS HEAVY (MORE THAN 12 KG (26.5 lb)) AND CAN CAUSE INJURY B
o
x
AND/OR DAMAGE. 2
a
V
_
N
a
5.2.4.2 Reason for the Job t
c
o
_
B
It is no longer necessary to indicate the exact weight of the component. o

x
2
b
V
If the component weight is already indicated in the Reason for the job, do not remove it. _
N
a
t
c
o
RULE _
B
o
If the component weight is more than 25 kg, the TDE can contact these persons to know if a x
3
specific/standard tool or two or more persons is(are) needed: V

_
● The maturity team (SIDOO)

N
a
t
● The Design Office c

o
_
● The Tool Equipment Manual (TEM) product leader. B

o
x
3
a
RULE: V
_
The number of persons necessary must be given in the Job Set-Up: N

a
t
● If the handling of a component is difficult c

o
_
● When more than one person is necessary due to the weight or dimensions of a component B
o
● If two persons must be in a different location to perform the task. In this case, the location
x
3
b
and the work to do must be specified in the Job Set-Up. V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
EXAMPLE for the component weight: _

D
o
c
_
C
TASK 32-31-22-000-801-A o
p
y
Removal of the NLG Retraction Actuator r
i
g
h
t

F
o
Self-explanatory o
t
e
r
NOTE: The weight of this equipment is approximately 63 kg (138.9 lb). V

_
N
Two persons are necessary to do this task. a

t
c
o
_
B
EXAMPLE for work in different locations: o
x
1
V
TASK 34-71-00-720-801-A _
N
Functional Test of the XPDR Function a

t
c
CAUTION: REMOVE THE PROTECTIVE COVERS FROM THE PROBES BEFORE YOU DO THE o
_
B
TEST. o
x
1
a
1- Reason for the Job V

_
N
To do a check of the correct transmission of: a

t
c
- The XPDR parameters with the aircraft in flight configuration then in ground configuration o
_
B
- The Elementary Surveillance parameters with the aircraft in flight configuration o
x
- The Enhanced Surveillance parameters with the aircraft in flight configuration 2
- The ADS-B OUT parameters with the aircraft in flight configuration then in ground _
N
a
configuration. t
c
o
NOTE: Two persons, permanently connected through walkie-talkies or mobile phones, are necessary _
B
to do this task: o
x
2
- One person in the cockpit to operate the aircraft systems a
V
- One person out of the aircraft to operate the Mode S test unit. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
5.3 Job Set-Up Information x

2
b
V
This paragraph is not filled in by the author. The information found in this paragraph will come up at _
N
a
finalization, generated by the different tags entered by the author in various parts of the Task t
c
(paragraphs 3. Job Set-Up, 4.Procedure or 5. Close-Up). If the author forgets to tag some data, they o
_
B
will not appear in the Job set-up information. o

x
3
V
_
N
a
This tagged information in the source content is grouped under the following parts and they must be t
c
o
presented under the following table heading: _

B
o
x
3
a
Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment V
_
N
a
A. Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment t
c
o
REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION _
B
o
x
3
b
● Consumable Materials _
N
a
t
c
o
B. Consumable Materials _
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
REFERENCE DESIGNATION D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
● Work Zones and Access Panels r

i
g
h
t
_
C. Work Zones and Access Panels F
o
o
ZONE/ACCESS ZONE DESCRIPTION t
e
r
V
_
N
a
● Expendable Parts t
c
o
D. Expendable Parts _
B
o
FIG.ITEM DESIGNATION IPC-CSN x
1
V
_
N
a
t
●
c
Referenced Information o
_
B
o
x
E. Referenced Information 1
a
REFERENCE DESIGNATION V
_
N
a
t
c
o
5.3.1 Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment _

B
o
x
This table provides the fixtures, tools and equipment that are required for maintenance operation and 2
not part of the mechanic tool box (standard hand-tool). _

N
a
t
c
o
Fixtures, tools and equipment are classified in 2 categories: _
B
● The non-specific tools (also called “No Specific” or “Standard”) o

x
2
● The specific tools a
V
_
N
a
5.3.1.1 The non-specific tools (also called “No Specific” or

t
c
o
“Standard”)
_
B
o
x
2
These tools are identified by their main features and have to be purchased or manufactured freely on b
V
the market. _
N
a
t
c
RULE: o
_
B
The designation of the standard tools must contain these minimum characteristics such as: o
x
3
● Capacity, volume, flow, pressure, temperature, V
● Dimension (height, length, diameter)

_
N
a
● Usage range, unit use t

c
o
● Material type. _
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
5.3.1.1.1 Standard Tool Request a
t
c
o
If a STandard Tool (STT) is necessary for the task and if it is not already available in the STT list, you _
B
must send a TechRequest to the “SEDYO Standard Tool STT” team and attach to the TechRequest o
x
3
the FM 1506022 form and the necessary source data justifying the creation of the standard tool. b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
5.3.1.2 The specific tools (also called “Non-standard”) V

_
N
a
t
These tools are identified by a Part Number (P/N) and listed in the Tool and Equipment Manual (TEM). c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
5.3.1.2.1 Specific Tool Request V

_
N
a
If a specific tool is necessary for an engine or nacelle task and if it is not already available in the TEM t
c
o
(or the Ground Support Equipment (GSE) list for development phase), you must send a Request For _
B
o
GSE (RFG) form (FM124006) to the SEMSB_GSETOOLS FRONT DESK team through TechRequest. x
2
V
_
For other requests, it is the responsibility of the originator of the tool request (Design Office, SIM for N
a
t
SB and MPD, SII, IIO) to send the related RFG form (FM124006) to the SEMSB_GSETOOLS FRONT c
o
DESK team through TechRequest. _

B
o
x
2
a
If the removal/installation tasks for a component weighing more than 25 kg are revised and are not V
_
using a specific tool, the author/TDE can contact the Design Office. If a specific tool is necessary, the N
a
Design Office must send a tool request RFG form (FM124006) to the SEMSB_GSETOOLS FRONT t
c
o
DESK team through TechRequest. _

B
o
x
2
b
If a specific tool is received in IMS-PA and not released in MADAME, the author/TDE must contact V
SEMS through TechRequest to know the GSE release target date. _

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
RULE: c
_
C
The request must be sent using a TechRequest (see figures 4, 5 & 6) o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
Figure 4: Specific tool request step 1 o

x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
Figure 5: Specific Tool Request step 2 2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
NOTE: _
B
o
The FM1240006 form is available in Mydoc. x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
NOTE: r
i
If you request a contribution in an existing dossier, create a message to Customer support and select the following team: SEMSB_GSETOOLS FRONT DESK.
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
Figure 6: For GSE contribution in an existing dossier D

o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
5.3.1.2.2 Tool Assembly _

C
o
p
When a specific tool is called in an AMM task, it could be necessary to describe how to assemble and install the tool on aircraft in the AMM task task.
y
r
i
g
h
t
RULE: _
F
o
o
t
Follow the flowchart to know when it is required to describe how to assemble and install the tool on aircraft in the AMM task. e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
When a specific tool is o
(1) necessary
p
y
r
This must be discussed with GSE team (SEMS) via i
g
TechRequest. h
t
_
F
o
Examples of “complex” tools: o

t
e
Installation of r
V
a bootstrap system for the removal of an engine _
mount
N
a
t
N
When you assemble the c
o
O
_
Installation of tool, does the tool have B

o
a specific tool for the removal of the Ram Air interfaces with the aircraft? x
1
Turbine module V
_
N
a
t
c
Installation of o
_
a clamping device, a rudder actuator turn-barrel, a B
o
balancer tool for the removal of the Electrical YES x

1
Backup Hydraulic-Actuator (EBHA).

a
The GSE
V
_
N
user guide must explain how to
a
t assemble the tool.
c
o
_
B
T o
YES Is it a complex x
N The AMM
he AMM task must describe and 2
task must not refer to the GSE

illustrate how to assemble the
tool? V
_
O
(1) N user guide.
tool and install it on the aircraft. a
t
c
o
_
B
T o
x
he AMM task must not refer to the 2
a
GSE user guide. V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
5.3.1.2.3 Tool Quantity c
_
C
o
● It indicates the quantity of identical specific tools necessary to perform the task (in the absence p
y
of data the value “1” is allocated by the system).

r
i
g
● Be careful when you set a tool quantity to “0”, the tool does not appear in the topic "Job Set- h
t
_
Up Information". F
o
o
● For some tasks, the quantity of tools can vary. In this case, the value “AR” (As Required) must t
e
r
be selected. V
_
As an example, safety clips are installed on the circuit breakers applicable to an operator. This N
a
number can be different depending on the aircraft configuration. t

c
o
_
B
o
RULES: x
1
● In case of multiple occurrences of the same tool in the same task, the tool must be tagged at V
_
each occurrence. N
a
t
● When the tool is already installed on the aircraft such as in a removal or deactivation task, the c
o
quantity must be set to “0” in the installation or reactivation task.

_
B
o
x
1
a
REFERENCE QTY DESIGNATION _

N
a
t
No specific 1 ACCESS PLATFORM 6M (20 FT) - c
o
_
ADJUSTABLE B
o
x
No specific AR SAFETY CLIP - CIRCUIT BREAKER 2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
5.3.1.2.4 Task Publication When a x
2
a
Specific Tool is not yet V
Released _
N
a
t
This is the decision tree to know if a task can be released or not when a specific tool is known in c
o
_
MADAME but not released: B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
SIMS generic address in Tech Request: SIMSB_GSETOOLS FRONT DESK B

o
x
2
a
V
GSE status in SAP: MADAME status (Part number database) _
N
a
t
c
o
PNDO: Part Number Design Office means Not released _
B
o
PNPS: Part Number Product Support means Released x
2
b
V
_
N
Escalation: Your TEM focal point is Christophe Debord a

t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
5.3.2 Special Transit Packages V

_
N
a
t
When delicate components such as instruments, computers, are removed from the aircraft, they must c
o
be placed immediately into the appropriate special transit package. _

B
o
x
3
a
The step(s) describing this operation must be at the end of the component removal task. V
_
Only for such task the function code 530 has to be used. N
a
t
c
o
NOTE: _
B
o
Special transit packages are considered as Support Equipment. x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.3.3 Consumable Materials D
o
c
_
Consumable materials are introduced with specific application codes. C
o
p
y
r
The consumable materials are products without defined form before its use. They are used in random i
g
h
quantity during the maintenance, repair and services tasks. t

_
F
They are not hardware material. o
o
t
e
r
EXAMPLES: oils, chemicals, paints, cleaners, solvents, special fabrics. V

_
N
a
t
In the AMM, these consumable materials are listed in the "Job Set-Up Information" (see figure 1) by c
o
_
a consumable application code. B
o
These consumable application codes are used to cross-refer the material to the right document. x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
Figure 1: Example of Consumable Application Codes a
V
_
N
a
t
c
These consumable materials are listed and described in separate documentations according to the o
_
B
responsibility of the part (e.g. Airbus, Suppliers …). o
x
2
b
V
For the AMM use, these consumable material documents are: _
N
a
t
c
o
> The Consumable Materials List (CML) part 1 Available in Airnav. _

B
o
x
3
> The AMM 20-34-00 - List of materials required for Integrated Drive Generator (IDG) V
_
Service and Maintenance N

a
t
c
o
_
> The AMM 70-30-00 - List of materials required for engines Service and Maintenance B
o
x
3
a
> The AMM 20-33-00 - List of materials required for Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) Service V
_
and Maintenance (For A318/A319/A320/A321 and For A330/A340) N
a
t
c
o
> The AMM 49-91-00 - List of materials required for Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) Service _
B
o
and Maintenance (For A380 only) x
3
b
> The AMM 70-02-02 - List of materials required for Variable Frequency Generator (VFG) _
N
a
Service and Maintenance (For A380 only) t

c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
CML description and usage: _

D
o
c
_
C
The Consumable Materials List (CML) contains information about all the consumable materials o
p
y
recommended by Airbus for the maintenance, servicing and repair of the aircraft and its components. r
i
The CML is a generic manual applicable for all Airbus aircraft models. g
h
t
_
F
o
The CML has one part: o
t
e
r
Part 1 - Products in Airbus Manuals: V

_
N
This part contains data related to the consumable materials referenced in the Airbus manuals (such a
t
c
as AMM, Structural Repair Manual (SRM), Nondestructive Testing Manual (NTM), Electrical Standard o
_
Practice Manual (ESPM), Component Maintenance Manual manufacturer (CMMm)) and used directly B
o
x
on the aircraft and its components. All this data is managed or endorsed by Airbus. 1
V
For efficient management of alternative materials, in each section of Part 1, the materials are _
N
organized by “Application”.
a
t
c
o
_
B
RULE: o
x
1
Only the application code (as given in the CML Part 1) must be used and tagged in DACAS. It is not a
V
allowed to tag the material code. This application code is an alphanumeric code (e.g. 06AAA1). _
N
a
t
c
NOTE: o
_
B
The DACAS search panel does not give the link between a material code and an application code. If o
x
2
you know only the material code, use the CML to find the correct application code. V
_
N
a
RULE: t
c
o
Never remove a CML material called up in a task unless you are sure that it is a wrong material or _
B
o
that it is no longer necessary. x
2
Get advice from the material specialist (Design Office and/or customer services SII). a
V
_
N
a
RULE: t
c
o
It is not allowed to give the application code for any consumable on the illustration. _
B
o
x
2
RULE: b
V
When it is specified in the task that the operator must use a specific application means (such as brush, _
N
a
oil can, grease gun), the related symbol must be added in the illustration (refer to PRD0063.0 2-D t
c
Illustrations). o
_
B
o
x
3
EXAMPLE: V
_
(2) Lubricate the rudder hinge bearing No. 4 with the Synthetic Oil base Grease-General Purpose N
a
Lithium Thickened Low Temp. – (Material No. 03GBC01) (recommended) or Synthetic Ester base t
c
o
Grease-General Purpose Low temp – (Material No. 03HBD9) or Synthetic Oil base Grease-General _
B
Purpose Clay Thickened – (Material No. 03HGBB1) through the grease nipple with a GUN –
o
x
3
a
GREASE. V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
The way to find the related CML application code is as follows: V

_
● Get the information from the relevant drawing (specification: AIMS, PQ, Z…).
N
a
t
● Use the technical notes to know the manufacturer’s product name. c

o
_
● Find in the CML the corresponding CML application code using the specification and/or B
o
x
manufacturer’s product name. In case of two corresponding application codes for the same 2
a
specification, the application code with most alternatives has to be selected (if approved by the V
_
Design Office). N
a
t
c
o
_
NOTE: B
o
x
In the CML, a table of correspondence is available between the old CML code numbers and the new 2
b
application codes. V
_
N
a
t
NOTE: c
o
_
The CML is updated every 3 months. B
o
x
3
V
_
5.3.3.1 CML update request N
a
t
c
o
_
RULE: B
o
x
In the specific case where only one material can be used for the intended action, it is necessary to 3
a
request the creation of an application code for this specific purpose. V

_
N
These cases remain limited and need to be confirmed first with the related Design Office. a
t
c
o
_
RULE: B
o
x
If the consumable product is not yet part of the CML Part 1, the use of this product on aircraft must be 3
b
confirmed first by the Design Office. V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
To request an application code for a consumable material in the CML Part 1, the author must send a _
D
o
request for approval to the Structure Engineering Support department (SIIS4). This request must be c
_
C
sent using TechRequest as follows: The name of the related Design Office must be given in the o
p
y
TechRequest dossier to facilitate the validation of the product in the CML. r
i
g
h
t
Before creating a request, use the search function of TechRequest to search for similar requests _
F
o
(product name in dossier title). o
t
e
r
NOTE: V
_
N
If you don’t have access to TechRequest, contact your ATA Leader who will do the request as shown a
t
c
below: o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
The answer from the Structure Engineering Support department will be: _
D
o
If the consumable product already exists, you will receive the CML application code and its status (the CML update is ongoing). c
_
C
Or o
p
y
If the consumable product does not exist, you will receive the Request For Information (RFI) excel template that you have to fill-in and send back to SIIS4 via
r
i
the same TechRequest Dossier. g

h
t
Fill-in the template as shown below: _

F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
Figure 2: TechRequest for CML request step 1 c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
Figure 3: TechRequest for CML request step 2 t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
5.3.4 Work Zones and Access Panels c

_
C
o
p
y
r
RULE: i
g
h
It is mandatory to systematically tag all the zones in which the task is performed, t
_
F
at task level. o
o
t
A specific tag must also be used in the task for the access panels. e
r
Both types of tags will automatically generate the table in the Job set-up information. V
_
N
a
t
EXAMPLE: c
o
_
B
o
C. Work Zones and Access Panels x

1
V
_
N
ZONE/ACCESS ZONE DESCRIPTION a
t
c
o
130 LOWER DECK FORWARD CARGO COMPARTMENT _
B
o
315 TAIL CONE APU COMPARTMENT x
1
a
536 WING TIP V
_
536AT, 536BT, 636AT, N
a
636BT t
c
o
_
B
o
x
5.3.5 Expendable Parts 2
V
_
N
a
t
5.3.5.1 General Information c

o
_
B
o
Expendable parts are items or parts whose condition can change during or after installation. They can x
2
be bent/deformed at installation or they can become degraded after a certain period of time. a
The expendable parts have to be systematically replaced during maintenance actions (such as _
N
a
packings, seals, gaskets, back-up rings, diaphragms, cotter pins, self locking nuts). t
c
o
_
B
The expendable parts table in the job set-up information gives the link to the Airbus Illustrated Parts o
x
2
Catalog (AIPC) or Power Plant Illustrated Parts Catalog (PIPC) to find the correct part number of the b
V
expendable parts: _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
EXAMPLE: o
x
3
V
_
D. Expendable parts N
a
t
c
o
_
FIG.ITEM DESIGNATION IPC-CSN B
o
x
2 O-ring CSN 21-21-12-01-040 3

a
V
30 Cotter pin CSN 36-11-48-05-190 _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
RULES: o
p
●
y
AMM / Illustrated Parts Catalog (IPC) Cross Reference between AMM Fig Item via IPC r
i
Catalog Sequence Number (CSN): g

h
t
In the case of two subtask variants in the AMM, the author must refer to the same AMM _
F
o
item reference in the two AMM subtask variants and call the same IPC CSN reference. o
t
e
Then the data assembly tool will calculate all the Fig/Item variants & solutions in the r
IPC. V
_
N
● No Part Number must appear. Only reference to the IPCs (AIPC, PIPC) CSN with a
t
c
variants must be done. o
_
● In the text, the instruction concerning “discard” must be included in the relevant
B
o
x
paragraph. 1
● If the expendable parts are not available in the IPC for tagging in the AMM, the AMM _
N
a
author must request the IPC author to incorporate them in the relevant figure (even if t
c
o
they are not in the Line Maintenance Part (LMP) or the Configuration Data File (CDF) _
B
provided by the supplier). o

x
1
● For the A320 NEO aircraft, the IPC database has been duplicated and the A320 NEO a
V
IPC CSN references have been created with the 5th digit of the ATA reference set to _
N
“8”. It has been agreed to not configure the AMM subtasks and to indicate both
a
t
c
references, the A320 CEO IPC CSN reference and the A320 NEO IPC CSN reference o
_
B
separated by “or”: o
x
2
Example: Install the 52730102-030-0-ring (6) or the 52738102-030-0-ring (6). V
●
_
For A330 Beluga XL, the expendable Part Numbers (P/N) are shown in the 3D IPC. N
a
Expendable part information is not shown in the AMM. t

c
o
_
B
o
x
5.3.5.2 How to use EXPD/EXPE/EXPEngine tags 2

a
For the A320 CEO and A330/A340 CEO programs, there is no Power Plant IPC available _
N
a
in airnav (no PIPC directly delivered by the engine manufacturers). Airbus IPC t
c
o
includes all Power Plant data. _
B
o
x
2
The applicable engines are: b
● CFM56-5A / CFM56-5B / IAE V2500 for A320 CEO aircraft _

N
● GE CF6-80 / PW4000 / CFM 56-5C / RR Trent 500 / RR Trent 700 for A330/A340
a
t
c
o
CEO aircraft _
B
o
x
3
RULE: V
You must use the “EXPD” tag in DACAS for all expendable parts related to the Nacelle
_
N
a
t
and Engine IPC parts to have the link to the Airbus IPC. c
o
CAUTION: DO NOT USE “EXPEngine” in DACAS. _

B
o
x
3
a
For the A318, A320NEO, A330NEO and A380 programs, there is a Power Plant IPC V
_
(PIPC) available in airnav (PIPC directly delivered by the Engine manufacturer). N
a
Airbus IPC includes nacelle data and PIPC includes engine data. t
c
o
_
B
o
The applicable engines are: x
3
● PW6000 for A318 aircraft

b
● CFM Leap / PW 1100G for A320NEO aircraft _

N
a
● RR Trent 7000 for A330NEO aircraft t

c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
● RR Trent 900 / EA GP7200 for A380 aircraft _

D
o
c
_
C
RULE: o
p
● You must use the “EXPD” tag in DACAS for all expendable parts related to the
y
r
i
Nacelle IPC parts to have the link to the Airbus IPC. g

h
t
● You must use the “EXPEngine” in DACAS for all expendable parts related to the _
F
o
Engine IPC parts to have the link to the PIPC. o
t
e
CAUTION: For the CFM LEAP (A320NEO) and RR Trent 7000 (A330NEO) r
engines, an IT incident is in progress. Even if you have an error message in the V

_
N
authoring tool when you use “EXPD” tag for the nacelle IPC parts, you MUST KEEP a
t
the “EXPD” tag because all the nacelle IPC parts are well included in the Airbus
c
o
_
B
IPC. The hyperlink in airnavX will work properly. o
x
▪ In DACAS, when a Nacelle IPC part is not available in the Expendable 1
search table, use the EXPD PlaceHolder. _

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
5.3.6 Cross-references 1
a
V
_
Cross-references are links to other tasks or documents. They are used to avoid unnecessary N
a
t
duplication of data or to get additional data. c

o
_
B
o
x
There are two types of cross-references: 2
V
_
N
Internal cross-references, which refer to other MP tasks or to other tasks and data recognized by the a
t
c
authoring tool (SD, NTM, SRM,). o
_
B
o
x
External cross-references, which refer to documents authored outside of the authoring tool (CMM, 2
a
Flight Manual). V
_
N
a
RULE: t
c
Do not write “Ref.” or “Refer to” before the tag because the tag includes the instruction “Ref. xxx”.
o
_
B
o
x
2
RULE: b
V
NEVER use parentheses/brackets when you tag a cross-reference. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
5.3.6.1 Internal cross-references x

3
V
_
N
a
Do not rewrite operations already given in dedicated tasks. Make a cross-reference to these tasks. t
c
o
There are two types of cross-references: _
B
● one for a cross-reference to a specific solution (mainly for the method of a task with restricted
o
x
3
a
usage) V
● the other one for a cross-reference to the invariant (no need for configuration management of _
N
a
the cross-reference). t
c
o
_
B
o
Do not make a cross-reference to another task for just one or two actions (steps). Include these actions x
3
in the task. b
V
_
N
a
RULE: t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Make sure that the all the steps of the referenced task are applicable to the need of your task. If this _
D
o
is not the case, you cannot refer to this task. c

_
C
o
p
y
For mechanical and electrical standard practices e.g. installation of hydraulic lines refer, if available, r
i
to tasks in Chapter 20 or 70. g

h
t
_
F
o
When a cross-referenced task is not available, the writer must inform the appropriate local line to o
t
e
ensure the issue of all associated tasks at the same time. r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
EXAMPLES: c
_
C
o
p
y
For DO r
i
The general illumination system of the cockpit is supplied with 28VDC. For the list of circuit breakers, g
h
t
refer to the paragraph "Interface" _

F
o
(Ref. AMM D/O 24-53-00-00) o
t
e
r
For ESPM V
_
N
A. Removal of the Digital Flight Data Recording System (DFDRS) Coding Panel a
t
c
(1) Disconnect the power supply wires (2) at the connector Ref. ESPM 20-44-24. o
_
B
o
x
For SRM 1
4. Procedure _
N
a
A. Inspection t
c
o
(1) Do a detailed inspection of the external portions of the framework of the cockpit side windows that _
B
you can see. This inspection is applicable between FR3 and FR10, left and right sides. o
x
1
(a) Corrosion damage: a
V
- If you find corrosion damage, refer to the Structural Repair Manual Ref. SRM 51-22-00 for _
N
a
types, inspection, removal and corrosion protection. t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
5.3.6.2 External Cross-References V

_
N
a
RULE: t
c
o
Cross references for information and not for maintenance instruction are not permitted in AMM tasks. _
B
o
x
2
a
The AMM tasks must be kept simple for the mechanics as much as possible. Cross references to data V
for additional information that are not strictly required to perform the on-Aircraft maintenance activity _
N
a
are not allowed. t

c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
5.3.6.3 Cross-reference to a SIL / TFU / AOT / OIT/ AD / ISI V

_
N
article a
t
c
o
_
B
5.3.6.3.1 SIL / TFU / OIT / ISI Article o

x
3
V
_
N
RULE: a
t
c
A cross-reference to these documents is not permitted: o
_
● Service Information Letter (SIL)

B
o
x
● Technical Follow-Up (TFU) 3

a
● Operator Information Transmission (OIT) V

_
N
● In-Service Information (ISI) a
t
c
o
_
B
NOTE: The SIL are no more used in AIRBUS. o
x
3
b
5.3.6.3.2 AD / AOT _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A cross-reference to Airworthiness Directive (AD) and Alert Operators Transmission (AOT) documents _
D
o
is not permitted. c
_
C
An AD can only be incorporated in the IPC. o
p
y
Normally, an AD must be covered by an Airbus SB to incorporate the technical changes in the r
i
related technical data products. g

h
t
_
F
o
RULE: o
t
e
If a system/component is sensitive and if the AD is not covered by an SB, a Note can be added at r
the beginning of the AMM task to refer to the AD for a specific topic with the validation from the V
_
N
Product Leader. a
t
c
The cross-reference must be made in a Note as follows: o
_
“NOTE: The [“name of the AD document plus its reference”] gives more information about [“the topic”].
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
5.3.6.3.3 Rules for reference to a CMM _

D
o
(Manufacturer or Vendor) c
_
C
o
p
y
r
Cross references to CMMs MUST BE LIMITED as much as possible. When there is a doubt, you must i
g
h
contact the Product Leader for approval. t
_
The following cases are always forbidden and no exception to the rule is possible: F
o
o
- Reference to CMM in free text, the words “CMM”, “CMMv” or “Refer to manufacturer’s t
e
r
instruction” for any maintenance task V
_
- Reference to the CMM for information only N
a
- Reference to the CMM in AMM tasks identified by MMEL/CDL or identified in the TSM as part t
c
o
of the trouble-shooting context. _

B
o
x
1
NOTE: V
_
As the mechanics have no easy or quick access to the CMM data and as the MMEL, CDL or TSM N
a
t
tasks must be done in a short timeframe (A/C dispatch, correction after trouble shooting), cross c
o
_
references to CMMs in the AMM tasks are no more permitted. B
o
x
1
a
RULE 1: V
_
The AMM or TSM tasks must give the instructions to be performed on-aircraft only. N
a
t
For instructions contained in the CMM and required to perform the on-aircraft activity: c
o
● The author must use the CMM as a normal source data* to author the task
_
B
o
● Thus, a reference to the CMM is forbidden. x

2
* Therefore, as for any other source data, the CMM must be identified (with its revision) within V
_
N
the list of source data as per TDS0116. a
t
c
As the CMM is used as source data in an AMM task, the CMM revisions must be tracked for possible o
_
impact. The author/TDE must be registered to STDE_Alert (supplier data platform) and follow the B
o
x
CMM revisions to identify any technical change. Evidence of the registration must be included within 2
a
the list of source data as per TDS0116. The registration to STDE_Alert is done through the SAP PCS V
_
transaction called “ZCH3_ALERT”.

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
RULE 2: 2
b
However, an exception to Rule1 is possible if a reference to the CMM instructions is unavoidable for V
_
a good reason: N
a
t
● The TDE must provide the rationale to the Product Leader for approval. c
o
_
● If agreed by the Product Leader, the task must give these instructions followed by the B
o
x
complete CMM reference: 3
“[On-aircraft action], refer to + [Tag ‘externalRef’ + CMM ref. + Vendor code].”

V
_
N
a
It is mandatory to indicate the vendor code (CAGE code) even for Airbus proprietary parts. t
c
● The TDE must check that the CMM contains the applicable technical content for the o
_
B
maintenance activity required. He must ensure that the CMM referenced in the task exists in o
x
3
MADAME (except for the engine supplier data). a
V
_
N
a
NOTE: t
c
Reference to the CMM is authorized as an exception for: o

_
B
- Cabin monument disassembly/assembly o

x
3
- Allowable damage and repairs for the landing gear b
V
- MPD tasks for passenger seats subject to late CMM availability due to late HIC test (for seats _
N
a
only). t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
EXAMPLE: _
D
o
c
_
C
4. Procedure o
p
y
Subtask 32-11-11-600-055-A r
i
A. Inspection g
h
t
(1) Do the inspection of the leg, Ref. CMM 32-11-33 (K0654) _

F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
RULE 3: a
t
c
If the maintenance activity is not performed on-aircraft, it is forbidden to give the CMM reference and o
_
B
the maintenance task must give these instructions: o
x
● For a task related to MPD:

1
(1) Remove the [equipment], ref. [related Removal task]. _

N
a
(2) Send the [equipment] to the workshop. t

c
o
(3) Install a serviceable [equipment], ref. [related Installation task]. _
B
o
x
1
NOTE: a
For a maintenance task related to MPD, it is not allowed to mention the activity to be done in shop _
N
a
because it is given in the MPD which is the driver for the scheduled maintenance. t
c
o
_
B
EXAMPLE: o
x
2
(1) Remove the escape slide, Ref Task 25-……. V

_
(2) Send the escape slide to workshop. N
a
t
(3) Install a serviceable escape slide. Ref Task 25-……. c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
● For a task not related to MPD: V
o Remove the [equipment], ref. [related Removal task].

_
N
a
o Send the [equipment] to the workshop for [name of the activity to be done in shop]. t
c
o
o Install the [equipment], ref. [related Installation task]. _

B
o
x
2
b
EXAMPLE: V
(1) Remove the pitot probe, Ref Task 34-11-15….. _

N
a
(2) Send the pitot probe to the workshop for repair. t

c
o
(3) Install a serviceable pitot probe. Ref Task 34-11-15…. _
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
5.3.6.3.4 Rules for reference to a o
_
B
supplier document o
x
3
a
When a reference to a supplier document is necessary in a task (Engine Manual (EM), Standard _
N
a
Practices Manual (SPM),…), the TDE must check that the supplier document contains the t
c
o
applicable technical content for the maintenance activity required. _
B
o
The engine supplier data referenced in a task must be tagged with the supplier data reference, the x
3
b
vendor code (CAGE code) and the provider reference (engine manufacturer reference). V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.4 Job Set-up D
o
c
_
C
o
p
5.4.1 Job Set-up Content y
r
i
g
This section indicates the information required for the job preparation in the AMM. It contains the h
t
_
actions required to bring an aircraft system, unit, or test equipment to a prescribed condition or position F
o
o
using normal functions and operations (such as opening or closing circuit breakers or switches, t
e
positioning controls or control surfaces, calibration or operation of test equipment, pressurizing or r
depressurizing, raising or lowering the landing gear, energizing electrical system). _

N
a
t
c
o
It is broken down into subtasks such as: _
B
o
x
1
● Aircraft Maintenance Configuration such as the required aircraft attitude (jacking), V

_
positioning safety locks, grounding of the aircraft, connecting ground electrical, N
a
t
hydraulic and air supplies c
o
● Get access to the Avionics Compartment (Circuit-Breakers) _

B
o
● Safety Precautions x
1
a
V
_
These subtasks must be added as applicable, according to the maintenance task N
a
performed. t
c
o
_
B
o
RULE: x
2
The job set-up of the task must contain all the safety precautions and instructions for the V
_
preparation of the maintenance task even if some of these instructions and safety N
a
t
precautions are also contained in the cross-referenced task(s). c

o
_
B
o
x
NOTE: 2
a
Electrical isolation is to be limited to those circuits on which work is being performed. Circuit breaker V
_
information is contained in a subtask using function code 865. N

a
t
c
o
_
NOTE: B
o
The subtasks dealing with any removal for access have to use the Function Code 010 (Refer x
2
b
TASK/SUBTASK NUMBERING SYSTEM for detailed Function Code definition). As far as practicable, V
_
the items subject of removal, such as access panels, components must be summarized in one N
a
t
subtask. c
o
_
B
o
NOTE: x
3
The information concerning the Aircraft Maintenance Configuration is to be grouped under function V
_
N
code 860 in one subtask. a
t
c
o
_
NOTE: B
o
x
Avionics-Compartment Access Door 811 is not fitted on the A330 Beluga XL aircraft. 3
a
However, it is allowed to keep the same illustration for A330 and A330 Beluga XL in the common V
_
tasks even if this door is shown. N

a
t
The decision made at the beginning of the development phase to keep that door was agreed with ATI. c
o
_
No change must be done in the future. B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
EXAMPLE (ON A380): _

D
o
c
_
C
3. Job Set-up o
p
y
Subtask 32-44-31-941-001-A r
i
A. Safety Precautions g
h
t
(1) Put the SAFETY BARRIER in position. _

F
o
Subtask 32-44-31-860-001-A o
t
e
B. Aircraft Maintenance Configuration r
(1) On the OMT, get access to the Power Distribution Control management pages V
_
N
(Ref. AMM TASK 24-71-00-860-801). a

t
c
Subtask 32-44-31-865-001-A o
_
B
C. Open, safety/lock and tag this(these) circuit breaker(s): o
x
1
V
_
PANEL DESIGNATION FIN LOCATION N
a
t
2501VU EBCU ESS SPLY 24GY 0541 c
o
_
B
2502VU EBCU BAT SPLY 25GY 2061 o
x
1
a
Subtask 32-44-31-010-001-A V
_
N
D. Get Access a
t
c
(1) Get access to the avionics compartment (Ref. AMM TASK 12-00-00-010-802). o
_
B
o
x
2
5.4.2 No special Job Set-up necessary V

_
N
a
t
c
o
RULE: _
B
If no specific action is necessary in the job set-up, use the Typical Sentence “No special job set-up is
o
x
2
necessary for this task”: a
● For A320 family: T138 _

N
a
● For A330/A340 program: T209 t
c
● For A380 program: GEN23.

o
_
B
o
x
2
EXAMPLE: b
V
3. Job Set-Up _
N
a
SUBTASK xxxxxxxxxxx t
c
A. No Special job set-up is necessary for this task. o

_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.4.3 Rules for safety precautions D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
5.4.3.1 Safety barriers h
t
_
F
o
The use of safety barriers is managed by the operators and specified by the operator’s instructions o
t
e
and their local regulations. r
V
_
N
Nevertheless, if the maintenance activity can lead to a risk of injury for persons, the step to put the a
t
c
safety barriers in position must be added in the safety precautions paragraph in these cases: o
_
B
o
● Operation of the flight control surfaces x

1
● Refueling and defueling _

N
a
t
● NLG/MLG extension/retraction c
o
_
B
● NLG/MLG door opening/closing o

x
1
a
● Aircraft jacking V
_
N
● Safety devices installation on the NLG/MLG. a

t
c
o
_
For the step, use this Typical Sentence “As necessary, use the applicable SAFETY BARRIERS,
B
o
x
specified by the operator's instructions and your local regulations.”: 2
V
_
N
●
a
For A320 Family, TS01 t
c
o
_
B
● For A330/A340 program, TS01 o

x
2
a
●
V
For A380 program, GEN35 _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
5.4.3.2 Safety rules tool (** ON A330 NEO ONLY) 2

b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
In order to help the authoring lines for the “Job Set-Up” and the “Warning/Cautions” authoring, a new _
B
tool called “Safety rules tool” has been designed. The objectives of this tool are to:
o
x
3
● Increase the level of safety in AMM tasks V

_
● Decrease the authoring lines workload N

a
t
● Harmonize the AMM tasks c
o
_
B
o
This tool provides safety rules recommendations per A/C areas and systems, it is not an exhaustive x
3
a
list of safety rules, but it provides the minimum requisite that must be put in each task. V
_
N
RULE: a
t
c
It must be used by the authors as a checklist. Before using it, you can watch the video on the Safety o
_
B
rules tool Home Page which explains how to use it. o
x
3
b
You can have access to the Safety rules tool Home Page as follows: V
_
● For internal employees:

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
> On the HUB 🡪 Customer Services - Engineering & Maintenance 🡪Tools and _
D
o
services c
_
C
● For external employees: o
p
y
> On Airbus Supply, through the user guide UG1800297 Safety Rules: Content r
i
Update Request Process. g

h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
5.4.4 Location of a command on a panel (**ON A380 ONLY) N
a
t
c
For a VU or VM panel, the following form will be used: o

_
B
o
x
“On the overhead panel, on [ the ADIRS section of ] the control panel 1221VM, push the…”
1
V
_
N
a
Optional t
c
o
First localization _
B
o
Second localization x
1
a
These panels have no designation except for the ECAM control panel. We must indicate then: “On _
N
ECAM control panel 1135VM, push the…”

a
the center pedestal, on t
c
o
_
B
For a LRU panel, the following form will be used without FIN indication: o
x
2
“On the Center pedestal, on the AESS Control Panel, push the…”
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
First localization Second localization x

2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.4.5 Cross-reference to another task D
o
c
_
Every time it is possible, you do not rewrite operations already contained in typical tasks. We C
o
p
make reference to these tasks (mechanical or electric). y
r
i
g
h
t
_
5.4.6 Access to Circuit Breakers F
o
o
t
Introduce the Circuit Breakers Table with the appropriate Typical Sentences that can be found in the e
r
following files on the HUB: Typical Sentences. V

_
N
a
t
For the A320 family: c

o
_
These Typical Sentences must be used to open or close the circuit breakers when there is no B
o
x
sequence: 1
● CB1: “Open, safety and tag this(these) circuit breaker(s):&STDTL_STT001240000010_AR;” V

_
N
● CB2 “Make sure that this(these) circuit breaker(s) is(are) open, safetied and tagged:” a
t
c
● CB3 “Remove the safety clip(s) and the tag(s) and close this(these) circuit breaker(s):” o
_
● CB4 “Make sure that this(these) circuit breaker(s) is(are) closed:”

B
o
x
1
a
These Typical Sentences must be used to open or close the circuit breakers when there is a sequence: V
_
● CB18 “Open, safety and tag these circuit breakers in this sequence:”
N
a
t
● CB19 “Remove the safety clips and tags and close these circuit breakers in this sequence:”
c
o
_
B
o
x
These Typical Sentences must no longer be used: 2
V
● CB14: Open this(these) circuit breaker(s): _
N
● CB23: Open, safety and tag this(these) circuit breaker(s) if installed:

a
t
c
● CB15: Close this(these) circuit breaker(s): o

_
B
o
x
2
For the A330/A340 program: a
V
These Typical Sentences must be used to open or close the circuit breakers when there is no _
N
sequence: a
t
c
● CB1 “Open, safety and tag this(these) circuit breaker(s):&STDTL_STT001240000010_AR;” o

_
● CB2 “Make sure that this(these) circuit breaker(s) is(are) open, safetied and tagged:”
B
o
x
● CB3 “Remove the safety clip(s) and the tag(s) and close this(these) circuit breaker(s):”
2
b
● CB4 “Make sure that this(these) circuit breaker(s) is(are) closed:” V

_
N
a
t
c
These Typical Sentences must be used to open or close the circuit breakers when there is a sequence: o
_
● CB12 “Open, safety and tag these circuit breakers in this

B
o
x
sequence:&STDTL_STT001240000010_AR;” 3
● CB13 “Remove the safety clips and tags and close these circuit breakers in this sequence:” _
N
a
t
c
o
For the A380 program: _
B
These Typical Sentences must be used to open or close the circuit breakers when there is no o
x
3
sequence: a
V
● CB1 “Open, safety and tag this(these) circuits breaker(s). Use the SAFETY CLIP-CIRCUIT _
N
BREAKER as necessary.&STDTL_STT001240000010_AR;”
a
t
c
● CB2 “Remove the tag(s) and/or the SAFETY CLIP-CIRCUIT BREAKER and close/unlock o
_
B
this(these) circuit breaker(s):” o

x
3
● CB3 “Make sure that this(these) circuit breaker(s) is(are) open, safetied/ locked and tagged:” b
V
_
N
These Typical Sentences must be used to open or close the circuit breakers when there is a sequence: a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
● CB5 “Open, safety/lock and tag these circuit breakers in this _

D
o
sequence:&STDTL_STT001240000010_AR;” c
_
CB6 “Remove the tags and/or the SAFETY CLIP-CIRCUIT BREAKER and close/ unlock
C
● o
p
these circuit breakers in this sequence:”

y
r
i
g
h
t
_
5.4.7 Access to the work area F

o
o
t
You will find all the Typical Sentences that start with the words “Get access” or “Close access” in the
e
r
V
Typical Sentences database. There is a file per program and you will have to choose the most _
N
appropriate sentence according to the content of the task. a

t
c
o
_
B
For the A320 family: o
x
1
Use these Typical Sentences and task references to get access or close access to the avionics _
N
a
compartment: t
c
● TS78 “Get access to the avionics compartment” plus Ref. TASK 52-41-00-010-002
o
_
B
● T233 “Close access to the avionics compartment” plus Ref. TASK 52-41-00-410-002
o
x
1
● T234 “Make sure that you have access to the avionics compartment” plus Ref. TASK 52-41- a
00-010-002 _
N
a
t
c
o
The Typical Sentences that follow must no longer be used because the get access and close access _
B
instructions must be part of the Get access and Close access subtasks (with the related task o
x
2
reference) and the opening or closing of the circuit breakers must be part of subtask 865 or 875: V
● CB22 “Get access to the applicable 5000VE-series panel(s). Then open, safety and tag
_
N
a
t
this(these) circuit breaker(s):” c
o
● CB26 “Get access to the applicable 5000VE series panel(s). Then make sure that this(these) _
B
o
circuit breaker(s) is (are) closed.” x

2
● CB49 “Get access to the avionics compartment and to the bulk cargo compartment. Then
a
open, safety and tag this(these) circuit breaker(s):”

_
N
a
t
c
o
For the A330/A340 program: _

B
o
x
2
b
Make sure that the related instruction to get access or close access to a given compartment is V
incorporated in the Get access or Close-up subtasks: _

N
a
Use these Typical Sentences and task references to get access or close access to the avionics t
c
o
compartment: _
B
● TS78 “Get access to the avionics compartment” plus Ref. TASK 52-41-00-010-801
o
x
3
● S036 “Close access to the avionics compartment” plus Ref. TASK 52-41-00-410-801 V
_
● S037 “Make sure that you have access to the avionics compartment” plus Ref. TASK 52-41- N
a
t
00-010-801 c
o
_
B
o
Use these Typical Sentences and task references to get access or close access to the applicable x
3
a
5000VE-series panel(s): V
_
N
a
● TS91 “Get access to the applicable 5000VE-series panel(s)” plus Ref. TASK 31-18-00-010-
t
c
o
80200 _
B
o
● S038 “Close access to the applicable 5000VE-series panel(s)” plus Ref. TASK 31-18-00- x
3
b
410-80200 V
● TS92 “Make sure that you have access to the applicable 5000VE-series panel(s)” plus Ref.
_
N
a
TASK 31-18-00-010-80200 t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
Do not use the Typical Sentences which give the get access instruction and the opening or closing of c
_
C
the circuit breakers at the same time. These Typical Sentences will be locked in the authoring tool. o
p
y
The get access instruction must be part of the Get access subtask (with the related task reference) r
i
and the opening or closing of the circuit breakers must be part of subtask 865 or 875. g
h
t
These are some examples of the Typical Sentences that will no longer be possible to use: _
F
● CB17 “Get access to the Avionics Compartment; Then open, safety and tag this (these)
o
o
t
circuit breaker(s):”
e
r
● CB23 “Get access to the avionics compartment and to the applicable 5000VE-series V
_
N
panel(s). Then open, safety and tag these circuit breakers in this sequence:” a
t
● CB25 “Get access to the applicable 5000VE-series panel(s). Then open, safety and tag
c
o
_
this(these) circuit breaker(s):&STDTL_STT001240000010_AR;”

B
o
x
● CB49 “Get access to the avionics compartment and to the bulk cargo compartment. Then 1
open, safety and tag this(these) circuit breaker(s):” _

N
● CB61 “Get access to the avionics compartment and to the applicable panel(s). Then open,
a
t
c
safety and tag this (these) circuit breaker(s):”

o
_
B
o
x
1
For the A380 program: a
V
Use these Typical Sentences to get access or close access to the avionics compartments, you have _
N
a
to use these Typical Sentences and task references in the Get access or Close-up subtasks: t
c
● GEN22 “Get access to the main avionics compartment” plus Ref. TASK 12-00-00-010-801 o
_
B
● GEN36 “Get access to the upper avionics compartment” plus Ref. TASK 12-00-00-010-802 o
x
● GEN81 “Close access to the main avionics compartment” plus Ref. TASK 12-00-00-410-801
2
● GEN120 “Close access to the upper avionics compartment” plus Ref. TASK 12-00-00-410-
_
N
a
802 t
c
o
● GEN198 “Make sure that you have access to the main avionics compartment” plus Ref. _
B
o
TASK 12-00-00-010-801 x
2
● GEN199 “Make sure that you have access to the upper avionics compartment” plus Ref.
a
TASK 12-00-00-010-802 _
N
a
t
c
o
To get access to the equipment, it could be necessary to remove/open an access panel. The access _
B
o
panel must be tagged. x
2
b
V
_
N
a
NOTE: t
c
o
When maintenance staff stand on metallic surfaces (such as a wing) to perform a task, there is a _
B
potential risk of damaging the surface with tools, objects under shoes. It is recommended to give o
x
3
instruction to protect the surface. V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.4.8 Access Platform and Safety Attachment Points D
o
c
_
Rules for safety attachment instructions: C
o
p
y
r
i
Work on a platform g
h
● Work on a platform below the wing, pylon, Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer (THS): No need to t
_
F
add a Warning because attachment is considered as standard practice when working on a o

o
t
platform. This is managed by operators under their own practices/regulations. e

r
● When it is necessary to lean over the platform to do the work (not to leave the platform), use V
_
N
this Warning to tell the mechanic to put on a safety harness and attach it to the platform: a
t
“BEFORE YOU START WORK, YOU MUST PUT ON A SAFETY HARNESS AND
c
o
_
B
ATTACH IT TO THE ACCESS PLATFORM. WITHOUT A SAFETY HARNESS, YOU o
x
CAN FALL. THIS CAN KILL YOU OR CAUSE YOU INJURY.”

1
V
_
For A320 Family: Warning 1424 N
a
For A330/A340 family: Warning 1398 t

c
o
For A380 program: Warning 1209. _

B
o
x
1
a
NOTE: V
To know the height of the work zone, refer to the AC (Aircraft Characteristics) section 2.3. _
N
a
To know the correct access platform depending of the work zone, refer to the Standard t
c
Tool List – paragraph Access Platform.

o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
Attachment points on the aircraft (**ON A380 ONLY) N

a
t
The specific areas where it is necessary to attach a safety device are given in ATA 12-00-00 MP02 c
o
_
Maintenance Practices. If a maintenance task requires work in one of these areas, it is necessary to B
o
make a cross-reference to the related task(s) in ATA 12-00-00 MP02 and to use Warning “2017”: x
2
a
“YOU MUST PUT ON AND ATTACH A SAFETY HARNESS BEFORE YOU START WORK: V
_
- IN THE NLG AND MLG BAYS - ON THE THS OR IN THE REAR FUSELAGE - ON TOP OF N
a
t
THE WINGS OR PYLONS. WITHOUT A SAFETY HARNESS, YOU CAN FALL. THIS CAN c
o
KILL YOU OR CAUSE YOU INJURY.” _

B
o
x
2
b
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
a
t
TASK 12-00-00-481-801-A c
o
Fall Restraint Systems for the Safety of Maintenance Personnel and General Precautions for Work _
B
o
at Height x
3
V
_
N
1. Reason for the Job a
t
This task gives: c

o
_
- All the fitting locations to attach a safety harness. B
o
x
- General precautions for work at height. 3
a
V
_
2. Job Set-up Information N

a
t
c
o
_
3. Job Set-up B
o
x
SUBTASK 12-00-00-941-001-A 3
b
A. Safety Precautions V
_
N
a
t
WARNING: c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
BEFORE YOU DO THIS TASK: _

D
o
- MAKE SURE THAT THE AREA BELOW THE WORK AREA IS CLEAR OF PERSONS c
_
C
- PUT PROTECTION ON THE PARTS BELOW THE WORK AREA IF APPLICABLE. o
p
y
IF OBJECTS FALL ACCIDENTALLY, THEY CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR r
i
DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT. g

h
t
(1) Make sure that the safety harness and the safety rope are serviceable. _
F
o
(2) When you use an access platform, make sure that this platform has a guardrail system and o
t
e
harness anchor points. r
V
_
N
SUBTASK 12-00-00-481-001-A a
t
c
B. General o
_
B
(1) You can find safety points to attach the harness when you do work: o
x
- In the nose landing-gear bay (zone 120) 1
- In the wing and body landing-gear bays (zone 140) _

N
a
- In the rear fuselage (zone 310) t
c
o
- On the pylon front structure (rib07) _
B
- On the wings, o
x
1
- On the Trimmable Horizontal Stabilizer (THS). a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.5 Procedure D
o
c
_
C
o
p
5.5.1 General y
r
i
g
When a task is created, it is mandatory to create at least one subtask in the paragraph 4. Procedure h
t
_
which covers the effectivity of the task. The Procedure content must be given in logical sequential F
o
o
steps and broken down into subtasks all starting with a level 2 paragraph (such as A., B., C.) that can t
e
be followed by levels 3, 4, 5, (refer to TASK STRUCTURE general layout) r
V
_
N
a
t
5.5.2 Corrective actions c

o
_
B
o
A procedure must only cover its purpose. Corrective actions which might be necessary or appear x
1
during the performance of the procedure are not part of it. V

_
N
a
t
RULE: c
o
_
The cross-reference must be quoted in the text using the specific tag. B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.5.3 Case of the data loading task (P. Block 03) (**ON A380 ONLY) D
o
c
_
C
o
p
5.5.3.1 On Board Maintenance System (OMS) Architecture y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
5.5.3.2 Data Loading and Configuration System (DLCS) N

a
t
c
o
_
B
The Data Loading and Configuration System (DLCS), as well as the Central Maintenance System o
x
3
(CMS) and the Aircraft Condition Monitoring System (ACMS), is part of the Onboard Maintenance V
_
System (OMS) and is hosted in the Network Server System (NSS), in the Open world. N
a
t
The Data Loading and Configuration System (DLCS) has these functions: c
o
_
- Data loading operations with the management of their protocols, B
o
x
- Repository (onboard software database) management, 3

a
V
- Aircraft configuration monitoring and reporting, _
N
a
- Software Pin-Programming (SPP) display. t

c
o
_
B
o
The DLCS application runs on the Aircraft Network Server Unit (ANSU) with a Human-Machine x
3
b
Interface (HMI) on the Onboard Maintenance Terminal (OMT) (OMS Home Page). V
_
The Equipment/Software configuration check is done on the OMT, through the DLCS application. N
a
t
The software is stored in the repository of the ANSU (P/N reference, no FIN, no designation), c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
NOTE: _
C
o
A media is used only to install software in the ANSU during SB application. p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
5.5.3.3 Data Loading – General principles o

o
t
e
r
V
5.5.3.3.1 Aircraft configuration for _
N
a
uploading of software to the t
c
aircraft systems in ATA XX: o

_
B
o
The aircraft configuration depends on the system architecture: x

1
• Specific A/C maintenance configuration for each equipment: V

_
N
• Software configuration check of the equipment before and after the data loading a
t
• Data loading of software to the equipment from the repository of the Avionic Network Server
c
o
_
Unit (ANSU) using the Onboard Maintenance Terminal (OMT) B

o
x
• Order of software to be uploaded 1

a
V
_
N
RULES: a
t
c
o
This must be taken into account in the uploading task in AMM ATA XX PB03: _
B
o
- Check of the software configuration of the equipment before the uploading operation. A cross x
2
reference to the AMM task 45-20-00-860-80100 must be done. This generic task describes how V
_
N
to get access to the Check (or System Identification Report) of the equipment. a
t
c
- Data loading of multiple components in the same task. A cross reference to the AMM task 45-20- o
_
B
00-616-80100 must be done. This generic task describes the operating mode to upload software o
x
2
components to the equipment through the selection of the hardware, the software source and a
the software components. V

_
N
a
- Order of the software components to be uploaded. t
c
o
- Check of the software configuration of the equipment after the uploading operation. A cross _
B
o
reference to the AMM task 45-20-00-860-80100 must be done. This generic task describes how x
2
b
to get access to the Check (or System Identification Report) of the equipment. V
_
- No specific test is required after a software uploading. N
a
t
c
o
_
B
Examples: o
x
3
Example 1: Get access to a System Identification Report V

_
N
TASK 45-20-00-860-801-A a
t
Get Access to a System Identification Report c

o
_
… B
o
x
4. Procedure 3
a
Subtask 45-20-00-860-004-A V
_
A. Get Access to a System Identification Report N

a
t
(1) On the OMT, on the OMS Home page, in the Main Functions pull-down menu, select: c
o
_
- DLCS - Equipment Identification. B
o
x
(2) On the Equipment Identification - Equipment selection page: 3
b
- Enter the search criteria to find the equipment and then start the search. V
_
- Click on the applicable line to select the equipment on which you want to do a configuration N
a
t
check. c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
(3) On the Equipment Identification - Results page: _

D
o
- On the System Identification Report part, click on the START button to start the system c
_
C
identification request (a progress bar comes into view). o
p
y
r
i
NOTE: You cannot make a request for a System Identification Report and an g
h
t
Information Mode at the same time. _

F
o
o
t
e
(4) After a maximum of one and a half minutes, the System Identification Report comes into r
view. Make sure that the hardware and software P/N(s) is(are) the same as the P/N(s) given V
_
N
in the Airline Configuration Management Document. a

t
c
o
_
B
Example 2: Uploading of Software to Equipment o

x
1
V
_
N
TASK 45-20-00-616-801-A a
t
c
Uploading of Software to Equipment o
_
…
B
o
x
4. Procedure 1
a
Subtask 45-20-00-616-001-A V
_
N
A. Uploading of Software to Equipment a
t
c
(1) On the OMT, on the OMS Home page, in the Main Functions pull-down menu, select: o
_
- DLCS - Load Uploading. B

o
x
(2) On the Load Uploading - Target selection page: 2
V
- Enter the search criteria to find the target (equipment) and then start the search. _
N
a
- Click on the applicable line to select the equipment on which you want to do the upload. t
c
(3) On the Load Uploading - Software selection page, select: o

_
B
- The software source (Repository or OMT Drive) o

x
2
- Then the software P/N(s) (from the list that is shown) you want to upload. a
V
(4) Click on the Upload button to start the upload. _
N
(a) If the selected software source is not the Repository, a question will ask you if you want a
t
c
to copy the selected load(s) on the Repository (before the upload): o

_
B
- Select YES: the load(s) is(are) copied on the Repository and then uploaded to the o
x
2
target b
V
_
N
NOTE: On the Uploading Progression page, the progress bar(s) related to the load(s) a
t
c
shows(show) 0% until the copy of the load(s) on the Repository is completed. o
_
B
o
x
- If you select NO, the load(s) is(are) directly uploaded from the medium to the target. 3
(5) On the Uploading Progression page, for each Software Part Number loaded: _
N
a
- Make sure that the progress bar shows 100% and that the Completed indication is shown. t
c
o
(6) Close the Load Uploading application. _
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
5.5.3.3.2 Tag for the software a
t
configuration check of the c

o
_
equipment B
o
x
3
b
V
A specific tag must be incorporated in the AMM task to give a direct access to the equipment software _
N
a
configuration page of the equipment (before and after uploading) in Airnav: t
c
● use the tag ‘sysInfoReport’ + Hardware FIN. o

_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
5.5.3.3.3 Tag for the uploading of p
y
r
software to the equipment i
g
h
t
A specific tag must be incorporated in the AMM task to give a direct access to the uploading page of _
F
o
the equipment in Airnav: o
t
● use the tag ‘dataLoading’ + Hardware FIN. e

r
V
_
N
Another specific tag must also be incorporated in the AMM task to identify the software component(s) a
t
c
to be uploaded in the equipment: o
_
● use the tag ‘sw’ + Software FIN. B

o
x
1
V
_
N
a
EXAMPLES: t
c
o
_
B
EXAMPLE 1: Uploading of software to the Flight Control and Guidance Unit (FCGU) o
x
1
a
V
This example gives the uploading task of an equipment: _
N
• With a specific configuration for uploading a

t
c
• With several components to be uploaded. o

_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
27-93-00 PB 301 CONF 00 - PRIMARY (PRIM) SYSTEM ((FCGU)) - SERVICING t
c
o
_
This task is required after removal/installation B
TASK 27-93-00-616-80100 o
x
of the equipment or after software failure 2
Uploading of Software to the FCGU a
(TSM). V
_
N
FIN : 1CE11 , 1CE12 , 1CE21 , 1CE22 , 1CE31 , 1CE32 N a

t
c
ew AMTOSS code 616 must be used. o
The FINs related to the components to be _

B
1. Reason for the Job o
uploaded must be tagged x

2
To upload the software to the FCGU. b
V
This task has these steps: _
N
a
- Two checks of the equipment/software configuration before the uploading t
c
o
- Uploading of software to the equipment _
B
o
- Two checks of the equipment/software configuration after the uploading. x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2. Job Set-up Information 3

a
V
_
N
A. Work Zones and Access a
t
c
Panels o
_
B
o
ZONE/ACCESS ZONE DESCRIPTION x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
210 COCKPIT FROM FORWARD PRESSURE o
c
_
BULKHEAD TO COCKPIT PARTITION FROM FR5 C
o
p
TO FR15LH/FR14RH y
r
i
g
h
t
_
B. Referenced Information F
o
o
t
REFERENCE DESIGNATION e
r
V
_
N
24-41-00-861-801-A Energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the External Power a
t
c
Receptacles 2, 3, 1 and 4 o
_
B
o
x
1
24-41-00-861-801-A-01 Energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the APU (APU V
Started with the APU Battery) _

N
a
t
c
o
24-41-00-861-801-A-02 Energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the External Power _
B
o
Receptacles 2, 3 and 1 x
1
a
V
_
24-41-00-861-801-A-03 Energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the APU (APU N
a
t
Started with the External Power Receptacles 1 and 3 c
o
_
B
o
x
24-41-00-862-801-A De-energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the External 2
Power Receptacles 4, 1, 3 and 2 V

_
N
a
t
c
24-41-00-862-801-A-01 De-energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the APU (APU o
_
B
Started with the APU Battery) o
x
2
a
V
24-41-00-862-801-A-02 De-energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the External _
N
a
Power Receptacles 1, 3 and 2 t
c
o
_
B
o
24-71-00-860-801-A Get Access to the Power Distribution Control Management x
2
Pages and to the Mechanical Circuit Breakers b
V
_
N
a
29-00-00-864-801-A Depressurize the Green Hydraulic System (Pressurized with the t

c
o
Hydraulic Ground-power Unit) _
B
o
x
3
29-00-00-864-801-A-01 Depressurize the Green Hydraulic System (Pressurized with the V

_
N
Electric Pumps) a
t
c
o
_
B
29-00-00-864-802-A Depressurize the Yellow Hydraulic System (Pressurized with the o
x
Hydraulic Ground-Power Unit) 3

a
V
_
N
29-00-00-864-802-A-01 Depressurize the Yellow Hydraulic System (Pressurized with the a

t
c
Electric Pumps) o
_
B
o
x
3
45-00-00-860-802-A Close the OMS Session b
V
_
N
a
45-20-00-616-801-A Uploading of Software to Equipment t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
45-20-00-860-801-A Get Access to a System Identification Report o
c
_
C
o
p
45-20-00-860-802-A Get Access to an Information Mode Result y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
3. Job Set-up o
p
y
Subtask 27-93-00-860-00100-001 r
i
A. Aircraft Maintenance Configuration g

h
t
(1) Energize the aircraft electrical circuits (Ref. TASK 24-41-00-861-80100) (Ref. TASK _
F
o
24-41-00-861-80101) (Ref. TASK 24-41-00-861-80102). o
t
e
r
(2) On the overhead panel, on the F/CTL section of panel 1211VM: V

_
N
Optional - Make sure that the PRIM 1 and PRIM 3 pushbutton switches are pushed (the OFF a
t
c
steps: legend of these pushbutton switches is off). o
_
B
FCGU NOTE: You can ignore the status of the FAULT legend of these pushbutton switches o
x
specific (on/off). 1
V
_
configuration to N
a
get access to its (3) On the overhead panel, on the F/CTL section of panel 1212VM: t
c
o
- Make sure that the PRIM 2 pushbutton switch is pushed (the OFF legend of this _
System B
pushbutton switch is off). o

x
Identification NOTE: You can ignore the status of the FAULT legend of these pushbutton switches
1
a
Report (on/off).
V
_
N
a
t
c
(4) On the OMT, get access to the Power Distribution Control management pages o
_
B
(Ref. TASK 24-71-00-860-80100) o

x
2
V
_
Subtask 27-93-00-865-00200-001 N
a
B. Make sure that this (these) circuit breaker(s) is(are) closed: t

c
o
_
B
o
PANEL DESIGNATION FIN LOCATION x

2
a
V
_
N
FOR FIN 1CE12 1CE11 a

t
c
o
PRIM1 31CE 2643 _

B
o
x
2
b
V
FOR FIN 1CE22 1CE21 _
N
a
PRIM2 991CE2 NA t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
FOR FIN 1CE32 1CE31 V
_
PRIM3 991CE3 NA N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Subtask 27-93-00-860-00200-001 _
D
o
C. Check of the Equipment/Software Configuration c

_
TS OMS13 C
o
p
y
CAUTION: IF THE RESULT OF THE FIRST CHECK OF THE EQUIPMENT/SOFTWARE r
i
CONFIGURATION (SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION REPORT) AGREES WITH THE g

h
t
C
AIRLINE CONFIGURATION MANAGEMENT DOCUMENT, MAKE SURE THAT YOU _
F
Caution DO A SECOND CHECK OF THE EQUIPMENT/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION o

o
t
4505 (INFORMATION MODE) TO CONFIRM THAT THE CONFIGURATION IS CORRECT.

e
r
V
_
N
First check of the NOTE: The check of the equipment/software configuration is necessary only a
t
c
equipment software after removal/installation of the FCGU. If you do this procedure to do o

_
B
configuration an update of the FCGU software of if a TSM task tells you to upload o
x
before uploading the FCGU software again, you can directly put the FCGU in the 1
uploading configuration and then do the uploading operation. _

N
a
t
c
TS OMS24 (1) On the OMT, get access to the Check (or System Identification Report) of the equipment
o
_
B
on which you want to do the software upload (Ref. TASK 45-20-00-860-80100): o

x
1
(a) Get access to the Equipment Identification page: a
TS OMS21 - 1CE11 Airnav provides an V

_
Specific tag with the hardware FIN to do a hyperlink to get

N
a
- 1CE12 t
check of the equipment software c
- 1CE21 access to the o

_
configuration. B
- 1CE22 Equipment o
x
E.g. 2
- 1CE31 Identification page
‘sysInfoReport’ + 1CE11 V
_
- 1CE32. for each target N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
TS OMS22 (b) On the Check (or System Identification Report) part, if the check (or system x
2
a
identification) request does not start automatically, click the START button to start it (a V
progress bar comes into view). _

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
TS OMS26 (c) On the result page:

2
b
- If the equipment software P/N(s) is(are) not shown or is(are) different _

N
a
from the P/N(s) given in the Airline Configuration Management t
c
o
Document, close the Equipment Identification page and then go to the _
B
subsequent paragraph (Equipment Configuration for Uploading or o

x
3
Uploading procedure). V
_
- If the equipment software P/N(s) is(are) the same as the P/N(s) given N
a
t
TS OMS45 in the Airline Configuration Management Document, do not close the c

o
Equipment Identification page. Continue the procedure to do a second _

B
o
check of the configuration through the Information Mode or 2nd Check. x

3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
Subtask 27-93-00-860-00300-001 c
_
C
D. Equipment Configuration for Uploading o
p
y
(1) Make sure that the hydraulic systems are in the depressurized-for- r
i
maintenance configuration (Ref. TASK 29-00-00-864-80300) g

h
t
_
F
o
(2) Put the FCGU in uploading configuration: o
t
e
(a) FOR 1CE11, 1CE12 r
On the overhead panel, on the F/CTL section of panel 1211VM: V

_
N
- Release the PRIM 1 pushbutton switch (the a

t
c
OFF legend of this pushbutton switch Optional steps:
o
_
B
comes on). FCGU specific
o
x
(b) FOR 1CE21, 1CE22 configuration for

1
On the overhead panel, on the F/CTL section of panel 1212VM: uploading

_
N
a
- Release the PRIM 2 pushbutton switch (the OFF legend of this t
c
o
pushbutton switch comes on). _
B
(c) FOR 1CE31, 1CE32 o

x
1
On the overhead panel, on the F/CTL section of panel 1211VM: a
V
- Release the PRIM 3 pushbutton switch (the OFF legend of this _
N
a
pushbutton switch comes on). t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
4. Procedure V
_
Subtask 27-93-00-616-00100-001 N
a
A. Uploading of Software to the FCGU t

c
o
(Ref. TASK 45-20-00-616-80100) _

B
o
x
2
a
NOTE: This procedure gives the uploading of the FCGU software to get the correct V
configuration. _
N
a
t
c
o
TS OMS30 NOTE: During this procedure, if an error message is shown, record the related fault code. _
B
o
Then do the related troubleshooting procedure. x
Airnav 2
b
Specific tag with the Hardware FIN provides an V
(1) For 1CE11 _

N
to select the equipment to be hyperlink to a
(a) Upload the 1CE11/SW1 - t
uploaded. get access to

c
o
(2) For 1CE12 _
e.g. the uploading

B
(a) Upload the 1CE12/SW1 o
‘dataLoading’ + 1CE11
x
3
(3) For 1CE21 page for each V

_
(a) Upload the 1CE21/SW1 target N
a
t
(4) For 1CE22 c
o
(a) Upload the 1CE22/SW1 _

B
o
(5) For 1CE31 x

3
a
(a) Upload the 1CE31/SW1 Specific tag with the Software FIN to be uploaded. V
_
(6) For 1CE32 e.g.
N
a
(a) Upload the 1CE32/SW1 ‘sw’ + 1CE22/SW1

t
c
o
_
B
o
Subtask 27-93-00-860-00400-001 x
3
b
B. Check of the Equipment/Software Configuration V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
CAUTION: MAKE SURE THAT YOU DO THE TWO DIFFERENT CHECKS OF THE _
D
o
EQUIPMENT/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION. Warning 4501 c

_
C
o
p
y
(1) Put the FCGU in the applicable configuration to get access to its System Identification r
i
Report: g
h
t
(a) FOR 1CE11, 1CE12 _

F
o
1_ On the overhead panel, on the F/CTL section of panel 1211VM: o
t
e
- Push the PRIM 1 pushbutton switch (the r
OFF legend of this pushbutton switch V

_
N
goes off). a
t
c
2_Continue this procedure only when the FAULT o
_
Optional steps: legend of the PRIM 1 pushbutton switch
B
o
FCGU specific goes off (after approximately 40

x
1
configuration to get seconds).

V
_
N
access to its (b) FOR 1CE21, 1CE22
a
t
c
System 1_ On the overhead panel, on the F/CTL section of panel 1212VM:
o
_
Identification - Push the PRIM 2 pushbutton switch

B
o
x
Report (the OFF legend of this pushbutton switch
1
a
V
goes off). _
N
a
2_Continue this procedure only when the FAULT t
c
legend of the PRIM 2 pushbutton switch goes off o

_
B
(after approximately 40 seconds). o

x
2
(c) FOR 1CE31, 1CE32 V
_
1_ On the overhead panel, on the F/CTL section of panel 1211VM: N
a
- Push the PRIM 3 pushbutton switch t

c
o
(the OFF legend of this pushbutton switch _

B
o
goes off). x
2
a
2_Continue this procedure only when the FAULT legend of the PRIM 3 V
pushbutton switch goes off (after approximately 40 seconds). _

N
a
t
c
TS OMS25 (2) On the OMT, get access to the System Identification Report of the equipment on which
o
_
B
o
you did the software upload First check of the equipment software configuration x
2
(Ref. TASK 45-20-00-860-80100): after uploading

b
V
_
TS OMS21 N
a
(a) Get access to the Equipment Identification page: t
c
o
- 1CE11 Specific tag with the hardware FIN to do _
- 1CE12 the first check of the equipment software

Airnav provides an B
o
x
- 1CE21 configuration. hyperlink to get 3
- 1CE22 E;g; access to the _

N
a
- 1CE31 ‘sysInfoReport’ + 1CE11 Equipment t

c
o
- 1CE32. Identification page _

B
o
for each target. x

3
a
V
_
N
a
(b) On the System Identification Report part, click on the START button t
c
o
TS OMS22 to start the system identification request (a progress bar comes into _
B
o
view). x
3
b
(c) On the result page, make sure that the equipment software P/N(s) V
TS OMS33 is (are) the same as the P/N(s) given in the Airline Configuration _
N
a
Management document. t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
TS OMS48 Do not close the Equipment Identification page.

o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
5. Close-up _
D
o
c
_
C
Subtask 27-93-00-860-00500-001 o
p
y
A. Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration. r
i
(1) After maintenance, put the hydraulic systems g

h
t
back to the initial configuration FCGU specific configuration to _

F
o
(Ref. TASK 29-00-00-863-80300) put it back to its operational o
t
e
(2) Close the OMS session configuration. r
(Ref. TASK 45-00-00-860-80200) V

_
N
(3) De-energize the aircraft electrical circuits a

t
c
(Ref. TASK 24-41-00-862-80100) (Ref. TASK 24-41-00-862-80101) (Ref. TASK 24-41-00-862- o
_
B
80102) o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
EXAMPLE 2: Uploading of software to the AESU c

_
C
o
p
y
This example gives the uploading procedure of software to a component: r
i
• With a software configuration before and after the uploading g

h
t
• With no specific configuration for uploading _

F
• With two components to be uploaded

o
o
t
• With several software components and a specific order for uploading.

e
r
V
_
N
34-71-00 PB 301 CONF 00 - AIRCRAFT ENVIRONMENT SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM (AESS) - a

t
c
SERVICING o
_
B
This task is required o
x
TASK 34-71-00-616-80100 after

1
Uploading of Software to the AESU removal/installation of

_
N
a
The FINs of the components to be t
an equipment or after c
o
FIN: 1SE1, 1SE2 uploaded must be filled with the _
software failure (TSM). B

o
specific tag x
1. Reason for the Job New AMTOSS code 616 1

a
To upload all or part of the software to the AESU. must be used V

_
N
a
This procedure has these steps: t
c
- Check of the equipment/software configuration before the uploading o

_
B
- Uploading of software to the equipment o

x
2
- Check of the equipment/software configuration after the uploading. V
_
N
a
2. Job Set-up Information t

c
o
A. Work Zones and Access Panels _

B
o
x
2
V
_
N
210 COCKPIT FROM FORWARD PRESSURE BULKHEAD TO a

t
c
COCKPIT PARTITION FROM FR5 TO FR15LH/FR14RH o

_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
B. Referenced Information c
_
C
o
p
REFERENCE DESIGNATION y
r
i
g
h
24-41-00-861-801- Energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the External Power t
_
F
A Receptacles 2, 3, 1 and 4 o
o
t
e
r
24-41-00-861-801- Energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the APU (APU Started with V
_
N
A-01 the APU Battery) a
t
c
o
_
B
24-41-00-861-801- Energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the External Power o
x
1
A-02 Receptacles 2, 3 and 1 V
_
N
a
24-41-00-861-801- Energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the APU (APU Started with t
c
o
A-03 the External Power Receptacles 1 and 3 _

B
o
x
1
a
24-41-00-862-801- De-energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the External Power V
_
A Receptacles 4, 1, 3 and 2 N
a
t
c
o
_
24-41-00-862-801- De-energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the APU (APU Started B
o
A-01 with the APU Battery) x

2
V
_
N
24-41-00-862-801- De-energize the Aircraft Electrical Circuits from the External Power a
t
c
A-02 Receptacles 1, 3 and 2 o

_
B
o
x
2
24-71-00-860-801- Get Access to the Power Distribution Control Management Pages and a
V
A to the Mechanical Circuit Breakers _
N
a
t
c
o
45-00-00-860-802- Close the OMS Session _
B
A o
x
2
b
45-20-00-616-801- Uploading of Software to Equipment _

N
a
A t
c
o
_
B
o
45-20-00-860-801- Get Access to a System Identification Report x
3
A V
_
N
a
t
c
o
3. Job Set-up _
B
o
x
3
Subtask 34-71-00-860-00800-001 a
A. Aircraft Maintenance Configuration _

N
a
(1) Energize the aircraft electrical circuits t
c
o
(Ref. TASK 24-41-00-861-80100) (Ref. TASK 24-41-00-861-80101) (Ref. _
B
TASK 24-41-00-861-80102) (Ref. TASK 24-41-00-861-80103) o

x
3
b
V
(2) On the OMT, get access to the Power Distribution Control management pages _
N
a
(Ref. TASK 24-71-00-860-80100) t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
Subtask 34-71-00-865-00300-001 c
_
C
B. Make sure that this (these) circuit breaker(s) is (are) closed: o
p
y
PANEL DESIGNATION FIN LOCATION r

i
g
h
t
_
F
FOR FIN 1SE1 o

o
t
e
2501VU AESU 1 TCAS / XPDR 10SE 1067 r
V
_
2501VU AESU 1 WXR / TAWS 11SE 1167 N
a
t
c
o
_
B
FOR FIN 1SE2 o
x
1
SEPDC2 AESU 2 WXR / TAWS 800SE SSPC V

_
N
SEPDC2 AESU 2 TCAS / XPDR 802SE SSPC a

t
c
o
_
B
Subtask 34-71-00-860-00900-001 TS OMS13

o
x
1
C. Check of the Equipment/Software Configuration a
TS OMS24 (1) On the OMT, get access to the System Identification Report of the equipment on _
N
which you want to do the software upload a

t
c
(Ref. TASK 45-20-00-860-80100): o

_
B
TS OMS21 (a) Get access to the equipment identification page: o
x
2
- 1SE1
Specific tag with the hardware FIN to do AirN@v provides an V
- 1SE2. _
N
the check of the equipment software hyperlink to get a
t
c
configuration. access to the o
_
E.g. Equipment B
o
x
‘sysInfoReport’ + 1SE1 Identification page 2

a
for each target. V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
TS OMS22 B
(b) On the System Identification Report part, click on the Start button to start o
x
2
the System Identification request (a progress bar comes into view). b
TS OMS26 (c) On the result page: _

N
a
t
c
- If the software P/N(s) is(are) not shown or is(are) different from the o
_
B
TS OMS27 P/N(s) given in the Airline Configuration Management Document, o

x
3
close the Equipment Identification page and then go to the V
_
subsequent paragraph. N
a
- If the software P/N(s) is(are) the same as the P/N(s) given in the t
c
o
TS OMS28 Airline Configuration Management Document, it is not necessary to _

B
o
do this uploading procedure (unless a TSM task tells you to upload x
3
the software again). For TSM requirement a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
4. Procedure c
_
C
Subtask 34-71-00-616-00200-001 o
p
y
A. Uploading of Software to the AESU r
i
(Ref. TASK 45-20-00-616-80100) g

h
t
_
F
o
NOTE: This procedure tells you how to upload all the equipment software components to o
t
e
TS OMS29 get the correct configuration. If it is necessary to upload only part of the equipment r
software, you can do the step related to the applicable software component(s) only. V
_
N
a
t
c
TS OMS30 NOTE: During this procedure, if an error message is shown, record the related Fault code. o
_
Then do the related trouble shooting procedure. Optional note: only if required by design
B
o
x
1
TS OMS15 NOTE: During the uploading operation, if Warnings come into view, ignore them.
V
_
N
a
Specific tag with the Hardware FIN Airnav provides an t

c
o
(1) For 1SE1: hyperlink to the _
to select the equipment to be B
o
uploaded. uploading page for x

1
e.g. each target a
V
_
‘dataLoading’ + 1SE1 N
a
t
c
o
_
TS OMS31 B
(a) Upload these software components in this sequence: o

x
2
V
_
Optional CAUTION: CAUTION: YOU MUST DO THE UPLOADING OF THE PWS ENVMOD N
a
Only if necessary SOFTWARE 1SE1SW6 (1SE2SW6) AFTER UPLOADING OF THE WEATHER t

c
o
(specific to the RADAR SOFTWARE 1SE1SW5 (1SE2SW5). UPLOADING OF THE WEATHER _

B
o
AESU) RADAR SOFTWARE 1SE1SW5 (1SE2SW5) ERASES THE PWS ENVMOD x

2
a
SOFTWARE 1SE1SW6 (1SE2SW6). V
Specific tag with the Software FIN to be uploaded. _

N
a
- 1SE1/SW7 e.g. t
c
‘sw’ + 1SE1/SW7
o
- 1SE1/SW5 _
B
o
- 1SE1/SW2 x
2
b
TS OMS30 V
(b) When the uploading is completed, upload these software _

N
a
components: Specific tag with the Software FIN to be uploaded.
t
c
o
- 1SE1/SW1 e.g.
_
B
- 1SE1/SW3 ‘sw’ + 1SE1/SW1

o
x
3
- 1SE1/SW4 V
_
- 1SE1/SW6 N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
(2) For 1SE2:
Specific tag with the Hardware FIN Airnav provides an V
_
N
to select the equipment to be hyperlink to the a
t
c
uploaded. uploading page for o
_
e.g. each target B

o
x
‘dataLoading’ + 1SE2 3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
TS OMS31 D
o
(a) Upload these software components in this sequence: c

_
C
o
p
y
Optional CAUTION: CAUTION: YOU MUST DO THE UPLOADING OF THE PWS ENVMOD r
i
Only if necessary SOFTWARE 1SE1SW6 (1SE2SW6) AFTER UPLOADING OF THE WEATHER g

h
t
(specific to the RADAR SOFTWARE 1SE1SW5 (1SE2SW5). UPLOADING OF THE WEATHER _

F
o
AESU) RADAR SOFTWARE 1SE1SW5 (1SE2SW5) ERASES THE PWS ENVMOD o

t
e
SOFTWARE 1SE1SW6 (1SE2SW6). r
V
_
Specific tag with the Software FIN to be uploaded. N
- 1SE2/SW7 e.g. a
t
c
- 1SE2/SW5 ‘sw’ + 1SE2/SW7 o
_
B
- 1SE2/SW2 o
x
1
TS OMS32 (b) When the uploading is completed, upload these software components: _
N
a
- 1SE2/SW1 Specific tag with the Software FIN to be uploaded.
t
c
o
- 1SE2/SW3 e.g.
_
B
- 1SE2/SW4 ‘sw’ + 1SE1/SW1

o
x
1
- 1SE2/SW6 a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
Subtask 34-71-00-860-01000-001 o
x
Check of the equipment software 2
V
TS OMS13 B. Check of the Equipment/Software Configuration configuration after uploading
_
N
a
t
c
o
TS OMS25 (1) On the OMT, get access to the System Identification Report of the equipment _
B
o
on which you did the software upload x
2
a
(Ref. TASK 45-20-00-860-80100): V
_
TS OMS21 N
a
(a) Get access to the equipment identification page: t

c
o
- 1SE1 _
Specific tag with the hardware FIN to AirN@v positions an

B
o
- 1SE2. x
do the check of the equipment hyperlink to get 2
b
software configuration. access to the V

_
N
E.g. Equipment a
t
‘sysInfoReport’ + 1SE1 Identification page for

c
o
_
B
each target. o
x
3
V
_
TS OMS22 (b) On the System Identification Report part, click on the Start button to start N
a
t
the System Identification request (a progress bar comes into view). c
o
_
B
o
TS OMS33 (c) On the result page, make sure that the software P/N(s) is(are) the same as x
3
a
the P/N(s) given in the Airline Configuration Management Document. V
_
N
a
5. Close-up t
c
o
Subtask 34-71-00-860-01100-001 _
B
o
A. Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration. x
3
b
(1) Close the OMS session V
(Ref. TASK 45-00-00-860-80200) _

N
a
(2) De-energize the aircraft electrical circuits t

c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
(Ref. TASK 24-41-00-862-80100) (Ref. TASK 24-41-00-862-80101) (Ref. TASK 24- _

D
o
41-00-862-80102) c
_
C
o
p
y
r
5.5.4 Case of the removal / Installation task (P. Block 04) i

g
h
t
A task will be created for all Line Replaceable Units (LRU) and for all the items incriminated in a failure _
F
o
message except for Standard items (switch, relays, indicators, circuit breaker, Pushbutton) for which o
t
e
a typical task exists in the ESPM (Electrical Standard Practices Manual). r
V
_
N
● The illustration of the Removal/ Installation task must be created in accordance with a
t
c
the IPC illustration. o

_
● If a figure is used for both removal and installation tasks, all views and sheets of the
B
o
x
1
figure must be fully applicable to both tasks. V
If specific instructions (detailed views) only apply to one of the tasks (such as sealant _
N
a
application, step and gaps adjustment during installation), they must not be illustrated t
c
o
in a sheet of the figure called up by both tasks, but in a different figure called up only _
B
o
by the applicable task. x
1
● At the end of an installation task, the following steps are necessary: a
> Put back the power supply, _

N
a
> If applicable, upload the applications in the component, t
c
o
> Do a test (if possible make reference to an already existing task except when _
B
the test is simple and can be written in a few words). o

x
2
V
_
EXAMPLE: N
a
t
c
o
4. Procedure _
B
o
Subtask 73-21-12-020-001-A x
2
a
A. Removal of the Data Entry Plug V
_
(Ref. Fig. Data Entry Plug SHEET 1) N
a
(Ref. Fig. Hi-Lock Bolt Removal / Installation Procedure SHEET 1) t

c
o
(1) Release the lanyard. _

B
(a) …
o
x
2
(b) …
b
(c) … _
N
a
NOTE: … t
c
o
_
B
(d) …
o
x
3
(2) Remove the data entry plug from the Engine Electronic Controller (EEC). V
_
… N
a
(b) …
t
c
o
(c) …
_
B
o
TASK 73-21-12-400-801-A x
3
a
Installation of the Data Entry Plug V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.5.5 Case of the Adjustment: test task (P.Block 05) D
o
c
_
C
o
p
5.5.5.1 BITE test Task (**ON A380 ONLY)). y
r
i
g
h
t
_
5.5.5.1.1 System BITE overview F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
Maintainability Requirements for Electronic Equipment N

a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
This illustration shows the interfaces of the Onboard Maintenance System (OMS) with the technical _
C
o
documentation in Airnav: p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
Airnav B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
5.5.5.1.2 BITE Description Document c
o
(BDD) (Required by ABD 200) _

B
o
x
Each system BITE is under the system designer responsibility. 2

b
V
_
The BITE Description Document (BDD) document is used mainly by Technical Data in: N
a
t
● The AMM D/Os to write the BITE paragraph and give the system BITE architecture and the c
o
_
interactive test descriptions. B

o
x
3
● The AMM MPs to write the instructions to do an interactive test in interactive mode for the V
_
operator. N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
5.5.5.1.3 BDD content for each system _

D
o
BITE c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
5.5.5.1.4 BITE source data access V

_
N
a
The BITE source data are: t
c
o
● The BITE specification. _
B
o
● The Extensible Mark-up Language (XML) file. For each new XML file, a Como is received by x
3
Tech Data. V
_
N
o The XML file can be consulted through the XML Visualization Tool.
a
t
c
o
● The BDD tool for: _
B
o
o The consultation of the Failure Message Description (BDD) for fault symptoms and x
3
a
tasks constitution, V
_
o The export of fault messages in Trouble Shooting Data Base (TSDB) (automatic N
a
t
filling). c
o
_
B
o
x
3
5.5.5.1.5 BITE task – Access to XML file b
V
_
The task to get access to the XML file for the consultation of BITE Test data is: N
a
t
● Select XML file and open the file with WORD PAD, c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
● Delete all lines up to <SPECIFICATION> then Record, _

D
o
●
c
Open the Visualization Tool in Business Application, _
C
o
● In ‘File’ window select ‘Open XML’, p

y
r
● In ‘Lock in’ window, select the XML file in home directory,

i
g
h
t
● Open the file and select ‘Skip errors’, _
F
o
● Select ‘SYSNAMES’ then related side, o

t
e
●
r
Select the test or specific function to be read V
_
N
a
t
5.5.5.1.6 Authoring rules c

o
_
B
o
RULES: x
1
● Only tests or specific functions called in AMM or TSM must be described in the MP. V
_
● The Task title must start by: BITE Test of the XXXX = Name of the system BITE that N
a
t
appears on the CMS. E.g. BITE Test of the Ventilation Control System (VCS). c
o
● If there are several tests or specific functions in the system BITE, the name of the test must _
B
o
be added between brackets. E.g.: BITE Test of the … (System test). x

1
a
● In the Reason for the job, the scope of the test must be incorporated. V
_
● For the system test of an application running in a Core Processing Input/Output Module N
a
t
(CPIOM), a mention must be added saying that the system test does not test the module c
o
_
itself. B
o
● Initial conditions and close up (if required) must be described in the Procedure paragraph
x
2
and in accordance with the XML file. V

_
N
● Job set-up must be used only to energize, to get access to the OMS home page + circuit
a
t
c
o
breakers + other specific configuration before entering in the interactive mode. _
B
o
● The Procedure paragraph must have: x
2
a
● The specific tag related to the test or specific function to be done V

_
● The selection of screens which must start from the OMS home page
N
a
t
c
● Selection of the SYSTEM REPORT/TEST page, o

_
B
● Selection of the ATA number

o
x
2
b
● Selection of the system BITE name, V
_
● Selection of the side name, N

a
t
● Selection of tests or specific functions

c
o
_
B
● Selection of the specific test or function by its name. o

x
3
V
_
N
NOTE: a
t
c
It is not recommended to use the exact names of tab/button (navigation between screens) or Details o
_
B
of screens (CMS HMI) to avoid any configuration management. o

x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
Printed Copies are not controlled. Confirm this is the latest issue available through the Hub. Page 100 of 241V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
5.5.5.1.7 Specific tag for BITE test p
y
r
selection i
g
h
t
RULE: _
F
o
To provide hyperlink between Airnav and the corresponding BITE test page on the OMS: o
t
e
● Reference of the test must be incorporated after the title mentioned in the procedure paragraph.
r
● Use of the specific BITE tag: _

N
a
o Bitetest + Side + side name + systemid + Target + Testid t

c
o
_
B
o
These parameters are given in the BDD Paragraph Test Identification and in each XML file. x
1
V
This tag must be repeated when the AMM task applies to: _
N
a
● One BITE identifier with several side identifiers, t

c
o
● Several BITE IDs with several sides (Case of Integrated Modular Avionics (IMA). _
B
o
x
In these cases, Airnav displays a specific window for side selection before access to the BITE. 1
a
V
_
N
Example for one BITE identifier with several side identifiers: a
t
c
o
Bitetest + Side + side name + systemid + Target + Testid _
B
Bitetest + 1 + ADR1 + 3 + OMS + 2 o

x
2
Bitetest + 2 + ADR2 + 3 + OMS + 2 V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
Example for several BITE identifiers with several side identifiers: B
o
x
Bitetest + Side + side name + systemid + Target + Testid 2

a
Bitetest + 1 + CPIOM F1 + 67 + OMS + 2 V

_
N
Bitetest + 2 + CPIOM F2 + 67 + OMS + 2 a
t
c
Bitetest + 1 + CPIOM G1 + 70 + OMS + 2 o
_
Bitetest + 2 + CPIOM G2 + 70 + OMS + 2 B

o
x
2
b
V
Example for one BITE identifier with no side identifier: _
N
a
t
Bitetest + Side + side name + systemid + Target + Testid c
o
Bitetest + 0 + FWS + 38 + OMS + 2 _

B
o
x
3
Example for one system BITE with several tests (here is described one test procedure): V
_
N
● Applicable for several sides,

a
t
c
o
● Without initial conditions. _

B
o
x
3
a
CORE PROCESSING INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES (CPIOM) - ADJUSTMENT/TEST V

_
N
a
Code 740 for each BITE procedure t

c
o
TASK 42-11-00-740-80100 _
B
o
BITE Test of the CPIOM (Module Test) x

3
b
V
_
N
1. Reason for the Job Reason for the job must provide the
a
t
c
To do a check of the integrity of the CPIOM brief scope of the test

o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
NOTE: The module on which you want to perform the test must be fully loaded according to the _
C
o
Airline Configuration Management Document. If the module is only partially loaded, the test will fail. p
y
r
i
g
h
2. Job Set-up Information t

_
F
o
A. Work Zones and Access Panels o
t
e
r
V
_
N
t
c
o
_
210 COCKPIT FROM FORWARD PRESSURE BULKHEAD TO COCKPIT B
o
x
PARTITION FROM FR5 TO FR15LH/FR14RH 1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
B. Referenced Information _
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3. Job Set-up 2
a
Subtask 42-11-00-860-00100-001 V
_
N
A. Aircraft Maintenance Configuration a

t
c
o
_
B
o
Job set-up must only (1) Energize the aircraft electrical circuits x
2
b
provide access to the (Ref. TASK 24-41-00-861-80100) (Ref. TASK 24-41-00-861-80101) (Ref. V
_
OMS home page TASK 24-41-00-861-80102) N

a
t
c
(2) On the OMT, get access to the Power Distribution Control management o
_
B
pages o
x
3
(Ref. TASK 24-71-00-860-80100) V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
Subtask 42-11-00-865-00200-001 _
C
o
B. Make sure that this (these) circuit breaker(s) is (are) closed: p

y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
4. Procedure _
D
o
c
Subtask 42-11-00-740-00100-001 _
C
o
A. BITE Test of the CPIOM p

y
r
i
Bite test 99-1-1 (CPIOM-A1) g
h
Bite test 99-2-1 (CPIOM-A2) t

_
F
Bite test 101-1-1 (CPIOM-A3) o

o
t
Bite test 101-2-1 (CPIOM-A4) e
r
Bite test 102-1-1 (CPIOM-B1) V

_
Bite test 102-2-1 (CPIOM-B2) N

a
t
Bite test 104-1-1 (CPIOM-B3) c

o
_
Bite test 104-2-1 (CPIOM-B4) Specific tag for BITE test to provide an hyperlink between B
o
x
Bite test 35-1-1 (CPIOM-C1) AirNav and CMS on the OMT: 1
Bite test 35-2-1 (CPIOM-C2) Example for CPIOM-A2 (second line): V

_
N
Bite test 36-1-1 (CPIOM-D1) Bitetest + Side + side name + systemid + Target + Testid a
t
c
Bite test 37-1-1 (CPIOM-D3) Bitetest + 2 + CPIOM-A2 + 99 + OMS + 1 o
_
B
Bite test 81-1-1 (CPIOM-E1) o
x
Bite test 81-2-1 (CPIOM-E2) 1

a
Bite test 67-1-1 (CPIOM-F1) V

_
N
Bite test 67-2-1 (CPIOM-F2) a
t
c
Bite test 69-1-1 (CPIOM-F3) o
_
Bite test 69-2-1 (CPIOM-F4) B

o
x
Bite test 70-1-1 (CPIOM-G1) 2
V
Bite test 70-2-1 (CPIOM-G2) _
N
a
Bite test 72-1-1 (CPIOM-G3) t
c
Bite test 72-2-1 (CPIOM-G4 o

_
B
o
x
2
TS OMS37 NOTE: During this procedure, if an error message is shown, record this message. Then do a
the related troubleshooting procedure. V

_
N
a
t
TS OMS3 NOTE: During the test, obey the instructions shown on the terminal.
c
o
_
B
o
x
ACTION RESULT 2
b
V
_
N
1.On the OMT, on the OMS Home page, TS OMS4 a
t
select: c
o
_
TS OMS5 - System Report/Test
B
o
x
3
- ATA 42 V
_
- The applicable CPIOM. N
a
t
c
o
The test is in progress. TS OMS9

_
2.Start the module test. B
o
x
3
a
V
_
TS OMS11 Indication that test is OK comes into view. N
a
t
c
o
_
TS OMS36 B
3.Close the SYSTEM REPORT/TEST The OMS Home page comes into view again. o
x
3
application. TS OMS35 b
V
_
N
a
t
c
5. Close-up o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Subtask 42-11-00-860-00600-001 _
D
o
c
A. Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration. _
C
TS OMS2 (1) Close the OMS session

o
p
y
r
i
(Ref. TASK 45-00-00-860-80200) g
h
t
(2) De-energize the aircraft electrical circuits _
F
o
(Ref. TASK 24-41-00-862-80100) (Ref. TASK 24-41-00-862-80101) (Ref.TASK o

t
e
24-41-00-862-80102) r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Example of a BITE test procedure (test with CAUTION): _

D
o
c
_
C
o
TASK 21-21-00-740-801-A p
y
BITE Test of the Ventilation Control System (VCS) (System Test) r

i
g
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE ARE NO PERSONS OR EQUIPMENT NEAR THE h
t
_
EMERGENCY RAM-AIR INLET FLAP. THE MOVEMENT OF THE EMERGENCY RAM- F
o
o
AIR INLET FLAPS CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE TO t
e
EQUIPMENT. r
V
_
N
a
WARNING: DO NOT START A "TEST WITH CAUTION" IF THERE IS A "TEST WITH CAUTION" t
c
o
IN PROGRESS. _
B
Warning 4502 IF YOU DO MORE THAN ONE "TEST WITH CAUTION" AT THE SAME TIME, THIS CAN o
x
1
CAUSE: V
_
- UNWANTED CONDITIONS N
a
t
- RISK OF DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT AND/OR INJURY TO PERSONS. c
o
_
B
o
NOTE: A "Test with Caution" is a test with a confirmation code. The system gives you the confirmation x
1
a
code and you must enter this code to start the test. V
_
N
a

c
o
This task is used to do a check of the integrity of Ventilation Control System (VCS) _
B
o
x
2
2. Job Set-up Information V

_
… N
a
t
c
o
_
3. Job Set-up B
o
x
Subtask 21-21-00-860-001-A 2
a
A. Aircraft Maintenance Configuration V

_
(1) Energize the aircraft electrical circuits N
a
t
(Ref. AMM TASK 24-41-00-861-801) c
o
_
(2) Make sure that no low-pressure ground carts are connected to the aircraft. B
o
(3) On the OMT, get access to the Power Distribution Control management pages x
2
b
(Ref. AMM TASK 24-71-00-860-801) V
_
N
a
t
Subtask 21-21-00-865-001-A c
o
C. Make sure that this (these) circuit breaker(s) is(are) closed or opened by the aircraft logics: _
B
o
x
3
PANEL DESIGNATION FIN LOCATION V

_
N
a
2502VU VCM AFT 12HG 3156 t
c
o
_
2502VU VCM FWD 11HG 3157 B
o
x
… 3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
4. Procedure _
D
o
Subtask 21-21-00-740-001-A c
_
C
A. BITE Test of the Ventilation Control System (VCS) o
p
y
Bite test 153-1-2 (VCS 1 (FWD)) r
i
Bite test 153-2-2 (VCS 2 (AFT)) Specific tag for BITE test to provide an hyperlink g
h
Bite test 153-3-2 (VCS 3 (FWD)) between Airnav and the CMS on the OMT: t
_
F
Bite test 153-4-2 (VCS 4 (AFT)) Example for VCS 3 (FWD): o

o
t
Bitetest + Side + side name + systemid + Target + Testid e
r
Bitetest + 3 + VCS 3 (FWD) + 153 + OMS + 2 V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THERE ARE NO PERSONS OR EQUIPMENT NEAR THE _
B
EMERGENCY RAM-AIR INLET FLAP. THE MOVEMENT OF THE EMERGENCY o

x
1
RAM-AIR INLET FLAPS CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND/OR DAMAGE a
V
TO EQUIPMENT. _
N
a
t
c
TS OMS37 NOTE: During this procedure, if it is not possible to continue the test or if an error message is o
_
B
shown, refer to the TSM to find the related trouble shooting procedure. o
x
2
TS OMS3 NOTE: During the test, obey the instructions shown on the terminal.
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
ACTION RESULT _
C
o
TS OMS4 1.On the OMT, on the OMS p

y
r
Home page, select: i

g
TS OMS5 - System Report/Test
h
t
_
F
- ATA 21 o
o
- VCS t
e
r
- The applicable VCS V

_
- VCS tests N
a
t
- System test (FWD and c
o
AFT). _
B
o
x
2.Start the test. On the OMT: 1
V
- An indication tells you that it will be _
N
necessary to enter and confirm a TS OMS19 a

t
c
confirmation code in a given time limit. o

_
B
o
3.Start the confirmation step. - The confirmation code comes into TS OMS17
x
1
TS OMS18 view.
a
V
_
N
4.Enter and confirm the code a
t
TS OMS20 before the end of the given time c

o
_
limit. B
o
TS OMS9 x
2
5.On the OMT, enter theThe test is in progress V
_
indicated confirmation code to N
a
accept the warning and to start t

c
o
the test. _
B
o
x
Indication that test is OK comes into TS OMS11 2
a
view. V
_
N
6.Close the SYSTEM The OMS Home page comes into view TS OMS35
a
t
TS OMS36 REPORT/TEST application. again.

c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
5. Close-up N
a
t
Subtask 42-11-00-860-00600-001 c
o
_
B
A. Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration. o
x
TS OMS2 (1) Close the OMS session

3
V
_
N
(Ref. TASK 45-00-00-860-80200) a
t
c
(2) De-energize the aircraft electrical circuits o
_
B
(Ref. TASK 24-41-00-862-80100) (Ref. TASK 24-41-00-862-80101) (Ref.TASK o

x
3
24-41-00-862-80102) a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.5.6 Reference to an illustration in the text D
o
c
_
C
o
p
RULE: y
r
● If it is applicable to the whole task, the reference to the illustration must be located in the i
g
h
procedure paragraph immediately below the task title. The reference to the illustration t
_
F
must be tagged just after the paragraph title and before the first subtask, in the invariant o
o
t
part: e
r
V
_
EXAMPLE: N
a
t
4. Procedure c
o
_
(Ref. Fig. Flight Management Computer (FMC) SHEET 1) B
o
Subtask 22-78-34-020-001-A x
1
A. Removal of the FMC V

_
N
(1) … a
t
(2) …
c
o
_
B
o
x
● If the illustration is applicable to the subtask only, the reference to the illustration must 1
a
be located in the procedure paragraph immediately after the subtask title. V

_
N
a
t
EXAMPLE: c
o
_
B
o
x
Subtask 29-11-41-020-001-A 2
V
A. Disconnection of the Green Reservoir _
N
(Ref. Fig. Disconnection/Connection of the Green Reservoir SHEET 1) a

t
c
… o
_
B
● If the illustration is specific to the step, the reference to the illustration must be located o
x
2
immediately after the step. a
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
o
_
B
(1) Prepare to remove the hydraulic pump: o
x
(Ref. Fig. Engine Hydraulic Pump B SHEET 1) (Ref. Fig. Engine Hydraulic Pump B SHEET 2) (Ref. 2
b
Fig. Engine Hydraulic Pump B SHEET 3) (Ref. Fig. Engine Hydraulic Pump B SHEET 4) V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.5.7 Text optimization within the task D
o
c
_
Avoid having too many different steps dealing just with the same item. It is necessary to optimize the C
o
p
contents of the task in order to improve readability and at the same time reducing the documentation y
r
volume. i
g
h
t
_
F
EXAMPLE: o
o
t
e
r
4. Procedure V
_
Subtask 52-21-12-020-001-A N
a
t
A. Removal of the Guide Arms and the Guide Arm Hinge-Fitting c
o
_
(Ref. Fig. Guide Arms and the Guide Arm Hine-Fittings SHEET 1) B
o
(1) Remove the guide arms (4): x

1
(a) Remove the protective cover (18). V

_
N
(b) Remove the lockwashers (12), the nuts (3), the washers (2) the guide arms (4) and the washers a
t
c
(1) o
_
B
o
x
1
a
5.5.8 Circuit breaker in the procedure paragraph V
_
N
a
t
c
RULE: o
_
If a subtask 865 is used in the procedure paragraph, it is necessary to have at least one other B
o
x
subtask with a different function code and with the same effectivity. If the subtask 865 is the only 2
V
subtask in the procedure paragraph of a task solution, the complete task solution will be deleted _
N
a
during data assembly and will not be visible in Airnav. t
c
o
_
B
EXAMPLE: Procedure paragraph with only one action to open circuit breaker(s) o
x
2
4. Procedure a
V
_
N
SUBTASK 525100040XXXXXXXX a
t
c
A. Do the step that follows to deactivate the Cockpit Door Locking System (CDLS). o
_
B
o
x
2
SUBTASK 525100865XXXXXXXX b
B. Open, safety and tag this(these) circuit breaker(s): V

_
N
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ a
t
c
PANEL DESIGNATION FIN LOCATION o
_
B
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ o
x
722VU CKPT DOOR LATCH 1MQ V39 3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.5.9 WARNING to be entered D
o
c
_
As soon as a dangerous product or tool is used, do not forget to enter a WARNING (check if it exists C
o
p
in the Warning/Caution data-base by using the SEARCH function). (Ref. List of maintenance Warning y
r
and Caution) otherwise request for a new one to be entered in the Warning/Caution data-base. i
g
h
t
_
F
EXAMPLE: o
o
t
e
r
TASK 71-13-42-000-801-A V
_
Removal of the Strake N

a
t
WARNING: YOU MUST BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU DO WORK ON THE ENGINE PARTS AFTER c
o
_
THE ENGINE IS SHUTDOWN. THE ENGINE PARTS CAN STAY HOT FOR ALMOST 1 HOUR. B
o
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL x
1
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS V

_
N
a
t
c
4. Procedure o
_
Subtask 71-13-42-020-001-A B
o
x
A. Removal of the Strake 1

a
… V
_
N
a
t
Subtask 71-13-42-160-001-A c
o
_
B. Clean the fan cowl door. B

o
x
(1) … 2
V
_
N
If the component weight indication is present in the Reason of the Job, the following WARNING will a
t
c
be added at the step level just before performing the work: <<W1203>>.(**A380 WARNING). For o
_
B
other programs, use the Search Function (for instance on words “Component” and “heavy”) in the o
x
2
Warning/Caution data-base and input the appropriate WARNING. a
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
o
_
B
TASK 21-52-65-400-801-A o
x
Installation of the Plenum-Fan Inlet 2

b
... V
_
N
4. Procedure a
t
c
Subtask 21-52-65-420-001-A o
_
A. Installation of the Plenum Inlet-Fan B

o
x
3
V
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU REMOVE OR INSTALL THIS EQUIPMENT. THIS _
N
a
EQUIPMENT IS HEAVY (MORE THAN 12 KG (26.5 lb)) AND CAN CAUSE INJURY AND/OR t
c
DAMAGE. o
_
B
o
x
3
(Ref. Fig. Plenum Inlet-Fan SHEET 1) a
V
NOTE: This task is for the installation of one plenum inlet-fan. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
5.5.10 Repetition of a privileged data B
o
x
3
In a task a privileged data has to be tagged as often as it is quoted (example: a tool quoted several b
V
times). ATTENTION on the quantity for tools. _
N
a
t
c
RULE o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Never enter a privileged data manually. _

D
o
c
_
C
o
5.5.11 Torque value p

y
r
i
g
There are two types of torque values: h
t
_
F
o
o
5.5.11.1 Specific torque values t

e
r
V
Specific torque values are the values specified on the drawings/source data. _
N
a
t
c
NOTE: When the source data or the BOM of the drawing gives the torque values and refers at the o
_
B
same time to an Airbus Process Specification (AIPS), the value has to be considered as specific. o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
RULE : _
B
o
The author must specify the specific torque values in the task: x
2
b
● By starting the sentence with TORQUE in capital letters before giving the specific _
N
a
torque value. t
c
o
● By using the tag TOR for the specific torque values. _
B
o
x
3
RULE : V
_
Always give a torque with tolerance. If the tolerance is not available in the source data, contact the N
a
t
Design Office and/or the Supplier. c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
See below an example for a specific torque value: V

_
N
a
t
EXAMPLE: c
o
_
B
o
4. Procedure x
3
b
(Ref. Fig. Mixer Pressure Sensor SHEET 1) V
_
Subtask 21-21-11-420-001-A N
a
A. Installation of the Mixer Pressure Sensor t

c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
(1) … _
D
o
(2) … c
_
C
(3) TORQUE the mixer pressure sensor (5) to between 1.12 and 1.51 m.daN (99.11 and 133.63 lbf.in). o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
5.5.11.2 Standard torque values F

o
o
t
e
Standard torque values are the values not specified on the drawings/source data. r
V
_
N
These torque values are not specified in the source data. They are defined in standard documents a
t
c
(AIPS, ADET, 80T, ABPT.2, .) and are given in the chapter 20. o
_
B
o
x
NOTE: When the source data or the Bill Of Material (BOM) of the drawing refers to an AIPS but 1
does not mention any values, it means that it is a standard torque value. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
5.5.11.2.1 Normal cases 1
a
The Standard torque values are defined in standard documents (AIPS, ADET, 80T, ABPT.2, ….).
V
_
N
As all standard torque values are given in chapters 20 and 70 Standard Practices, it is not necessary a
t
c
to specify them in AMM task. o
_
B
o
x
2
NOTE: V
When the source data or the BOM of the drawing refers to an AIPS, it means it is a standard torque _
N
a
value. t
c
o
_
B
o
RULE: x
2
For the standard torque values, the author must: a
● Use the term ‘’Tighten” (instead of TORQUE) without value when the torque value is _
N
a
not specified on the drawing/source data and when the part concerned is not a fuel or t
c
o
hydraulic fluid connection. _
B
● Make sure that the related standard part is listed in ATA 20 in the section Standard o
x
2
Torques. If the standard part is not listed, contact the ATA 20 Tech Data ATA Leader b
V
(TD Engineers). _
N
● Not refer to chapters 20 and 70 Standard Practices. a

t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
a
4. Procedure t
c
o
Subtask 21-20-00-560-001-A _
B
o
A. Preparation of the Replacement Air-Conditioning Distribution Duct x
3
…
a
B. Connection of the Air-Conditioning Distribution Duct(s) _

N
a
(1) … t
c
o
(a) Put the bellows (3) and the clamps (2) in their correct positions on the duct (1) and tighten the _
B
o
clamps (2). x
3
Refer to examples A and G. b
V
(b) … _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
5.5.11.2.2 Specific cases: for fuel or _

D
o
hydraulic fluid connections c

_
C
o
For these specific cases, the values must be specified in the task. p
y
r
i
g
h
NOTE: t
_
If the value is in the source data, apply the rule for specific torque. F
o
o
t
e
r
RULE 1: V
_
N
a
For fuel and hydraulic fluid connections: t

c
o
● When the value is not given in the source data, the torque value must be given inside the task. _
B
o
In that case, the torque value must be retrieved either from NSA 2017 or from AMM chapter x
1
20. Then, you must start the sentence with TORQUE in capital letters and give the torque V
_
values with the tag TORS (instead of TOR). N

a
t
● When the value is given in the source data, apply the rule for specific torque, specify these c
o
_
torque values in the task. You must start the sentence with TORQUE in capital letters and give B
o
x
the torque values with the tag TOR. 1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
RULE 2: B
o
x
2
In the step related to the hydraulic connections only, the author must: V
_
N
● add the reference to the AMM task Tightening Practices for Hydraulic Connections a
t
o For A320 family: 20-23-11-917-001

c
o
_
o For A330/A340 and A380 programs: 20-23-11-917-801 B

o
x
● Add the Typical Sentence “identify the tightened union nuts with a red line”: 2
a
> For A320 family: HYD1 V

_
N
> For A330/A340: HYD1 a
t
> For A380: HYD40. c

o
_
with the task reference: B

o
x
> For A320 family: ATA 20-23-22-910-801 Marking of the Unions after Application 2
b
of Standard or Specific Tightening Torque V

_
> For A330/A340: ATA 20-23-22-910-801 Marking of the Unions after Standard N
a
t
or Specific Tightening Torque Application c

o
_
> For A380: ATA 20-23-22-930-801 Application of Standard or Specific B
o
x
Tightening Torque Values (Hydraulic and Oxygen Systems). 3
V
_
N
Example a
t
c
(1) Connect the applicable hydraulic unions Ref. AMM TASK 20-23-11-917-001 o
_
B
(2) TORQUE the connection (8) to between 1.4 and 1.6 m.daN (10.32 and 11.80 lbf.ft). o
x
(3) Identify the tightened union nuts with a red line Ref. AMM TASK 20-23-22-910-001 3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
5.5.11.3 Traceability of torque value source data _

D
o
c
_
RULE: C
o
The source data used for a given torque value must be recorded in the authoring tool to ensure p
y
r
traceability: i
g
h
● The source information related to the torque value must be filled in the Torque Value panel. t
_
F
The source reference must be filled in uppercase letters and any space must be replaced by o
o
an underscore “_”. t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
5.5.11.4 Units _
D
o
c
_
The torque value must be given in the text in both systems: C
o
● Metric (International System): p

y
r
● Meter deca Newton m.daN i

g
h
● Meter Newton m.N t
_
● Imperial (United States):

F
o
o
● Pound-force-foot lbf.ft t
e
r
● Pound-force-inch lbf.in V
_
N
a
t
c
o
RULE: The first unit to be mentioned must be the unit specified in the source data document. _
B
o
x
1
NOTE: V
_
N
As it is now allowed to enter torque values in m.N unit, it is no more necessary to convert the metric a
t
values in m.daN. c
o
_
B
o
x
1
5.5.12 Numeric value a
V
_
N
If a numeric value is necessary, a specific tag must be used to convert numerical values entered by a
t
the author from one international system of measurement to another international system. c
o
_
B
o
x
NOTE: 2
V
The converted values have to be rounded off in the following way: _
N
● Pressure in Pound Square Inch (PSI): no decimal a

t
c
● Weight or liter: only one digit after the comma. o

_
B
o
x
2
For more information refer to TDS0041. a
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
o
_
B
TASK 32-00-00-614-802-A o
x
Pressurization of the Nose Wheel Steering Accumulator 2

b
...... V
_
N
(6) Set the gas supply pressure on the gage to between 25 bar (362 psi) and 40 bar a
t
c
(580 psi). This will make sure that the piston in the accumulator is in the correct position. o
_
(7) Slowly open the inflation valve (3) and pressurize the accumulator to between 25 bar (362 psi) and B
o
x
40 bar (580 psi). 3
V
(8) Close the inflation valve (3). _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
5.5.13 Bonding D
o
c
_
C
o
p
RULES: y
r
If bonding is necessary according to the installation drawing, the installation task of the component i
g
h
must include the following steps: t

_
F
● Before installing the component, a step to “Prepare the surface of the bonding point(s)” o
o
t
with a cross-reference to the Bonding Surface Preparation task: e
r
o For A320 family: Typical Sentence T161 + ref to AMM task 20-28-00-912-80300 V
_
o For the A330/A340 family: Typical Sentence T224 + ref to AMM task 20-28-00-912- N
a
t
81100 c
o
o For A380: Typical Sentence GEN158 + ref to AMM task 20-28-00-912-80900.

_
B
o
● After the installation of the component, a step to “Do the electrical resistance x
1
measurement and the final protection of the bonding point(s)” with a cross-reference to V
_
N
the general maintenance task of electrical bonding: a
t
o For A320 family: Typical Sentence T162 + ref to AMM task 20-28-00-912-80200
c
o
_
o For the A330/A340 family: Typical Sentence T225 + ref to AMM task 20-28-00-912- B
o
x
81000 1
a
o For A380: Typical Sentence GEN159 + ref to AMM task 20-28-00-912-80800. V

_
● If the resistance value is given in the installation drawing, a step to “Make sure that the
N
a
t
bonding contact resistance between component A and the structure is not higher than c
o
_
X milliohms”. B
o
x
2
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
4. Procedure o
_
B
Ref. Fig. Weather Antenna Drive-Unit o

x
2
SUBTASK 34-71-18-420-003-A a
V
A. Installation of the Weather Antenna Drive-Unit _
N
Ref. Fig. Installation of the WXR Antenna Drive-Unit (3D ANIMATION) a

t
c
(1) Do a visual inspection and clean the component interfaces and the adjacent area. o
_
B
(2) Prepare the surface of the bonding point(s) of the weather antenna drive-unit (3) Ref. o
x
2
AMM TASK 20-28-00-912-809. b
(3) Lift the weather antenna drive-unit (3) up to its support (7) and engage it in the two upper V
_
N
bolts (5) and washers (6). a

t
c
(4) Install the two lower bolts (11) and washers (10). o
_
…
B
o
x
(8) Do the electrical resistance measurement and the final protection of the bonding 3
point(s) Ref. AMM TASK 20-28-00-912-808: _

N
a
o Make sure that the maximum bonding value at the bolts (5) and (11) is not t
c
o
higher/more than 5 milliohms. _
B
o
x
3
a
5.6 Close-up (Para. 5) V

_
N
a
This paragraph is broken down into one or several subtask(s) (Ref. TASK/SUBTASK NUMBERING t
c
o
SYSTEM) and its content may vary according to the Page Block. It must cover all the work steps in _
B
order to put the aircraft back to its initial configuration such as: o
x
3
b
V
● Close access (subtask code: 410) _
N
●
a
Remove access platform(s) or Warning notice(s) t
c
● De-energize the aircraft electrical circuits o

_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
● Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items. _
D
o
EXAMPLE: c
_
C
o
p
y
5. Close-up r
i
Subtask 25-11-00-860-001-A g
h
t
A. Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration. _

F
(1) …
o
o
t
…
e
r
(6) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items. V
_
N
a
t
c
● In order to limit the numbers of steps in the Close-up, group the step in one or two o
_
B
sentences: o
x
1
EXAMPLE: _
N
a
t
c
o
Subtask 28-25-00-860-050 _
B
… o
x
1
B. Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration. a
V
(1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items. _
N
a
(2) Remove the warning notice(s) and the access platform(s). t
c
o
_
B
● In special cases, reinstate power to those areas that have been isolated for reasons of o
x
2
general safety. V
_
EXAMPLE: N
a
t
c
o
5. Close-up _
B
o
Subtask 29-00-00-860-022-A x
2
a
A. Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration. V
(1) After maintenance, put the hydraulic systems back to the initial configuration _
N
a
t
c
o
(Ref. AMM TASK 29-00-00-863-803) _
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
● Use subtask code 410 to clean and close all the access. _
D
o
c
_
C
The same rules as defined in Note 2, Para C "Job Set-up" have to be applied. The function Code 410 o
p
y
must be used for installing the items, which have been removed with Subtask Function Code 010. r
i
g
h
t
EXAMPLE: _
F
o
5. Close-up o
t
e
Subtask 05-21-10-410-001-A r
A. Close Access V
_
N
(1) Put the access panel 125DZ in the vertical position (Ref. AMM TASK 53-17-41-410-801). a
t
c
(2) Install the access panels 125BZ 125CZ 126AZ 126BZ at FR0 (Ref. AMM TASK 53-17-41-410- o
_
B
801). o
x
(3) Remove all the fixtures, tools, test and support equipment used during this procedure. 1
(4) Close the NLG doors (Ref. AMM TASK 32-22-00-410-801). _

N
a
Subtask 05-21-10-865-002-A t
c
o
_
B
B. Remove the tag(s) and/or the SAFETY CLIP-CIRCUIT BREAKER and close/unlock this o
x
1
(these) circuit breaker(s): a
V
_
N
a
PANEL DESIGNATION FIN LOCATION t

c
o
_
2501VU AESU 1 TCAS / XPDR 10SE 1067 B
o
x
2501VU AESU 1 WXR / TAWS 11SE 1167 2
SEPDC2 AESU 2 WXR / TAWS 800SE SSPC V

_
N
SEPDC2 AESU 2 TCAS / XPDR 802SE SSPC a
t
c
Subtask 05-21-10-860-002-A o
_
B
o
x
C. Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration. 2

a
(1) Close the OMS session V

_
N
(Ref. AMM TASK 45-00-00-860-802) a
t
c
_
B
(Ref. AMM TASK 24-41-00-862-801) o
x
2
b
V
_
●
N
Use subtask code 865 to close the Circuit Breakers a
t
c
o
_
NOTE: B
o
x
It is mandatory to repeat the circuit breaker table to close the circuit breakers in a Subtask 865 3
V
_
N
a
Use subtask code 860 to restore the aircraft to its initial configuration (Ref. List of Typical Sentences) t
c
o
_
B
● You can also use Typical Sentences (TS21 for SA and LR) and GEN137 (for A380) in o
x
3
the title of the level 2 paragraph. a
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
o
_
B
Subtask 21-00-00-860-004-A o
x
3
B. Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration. b
(1) On the overhead panel, on the control panel 1225VM, set the X BLEED selector-switch to AUTO. V
_
N
(2) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items. a
t
c
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
(Ref. AMM TASK 24-41-00-862-801). _

D
o
(4) Remove the ACCESS PLATFORM(S). c

_
C
(5) Remove the ground support and maintenance equipment, the special and standard tools and all o
p
y
other items. r
i
g
h
t
● Use subtask code 942 used for the Close-Up to cover the removal of various items of _
F
o
equipment o
t
e
r
RULE: V
_
N
a
t
If the specific tool has a specific step for its installation on the aircraft, there must also be the detailed c
o
step to remove the tool. In case of a simple specific tool installation, add a step with this Typical _
B
o
Sentence “Remove the ground support and maintenance equipment, the special and standard tools x
1
and all other items.” V

_
N
For A320 Family and A330/A340 programs, use the Typical Sentence TS12. a
t
For A380 program, use the Typical Sentence GEN2. c

o
_
B
o
x
SGML Rules 1
a
The text format is in Standard Generalized Markup Language (SGML). V

_
The following rules must be applied in MP Page Blocks: N

a
t
c
o
● An MP Page Block must always contain text (not only graphics)

_
B
o
x
2
● TASK Title is mandatory V

_
N
a
t
● Ref. Fig., Warning, Caution, and Note must be acquired in this order (at TASK, topic and c
o
_
Subtask level) B
o
x
2
a
● All the Subtask variants must begin with a level 2 Paragraph (such as A., B.,), Ref. V
_
Para.Task Structure N
a
t
c
o
● A Subtask variant cannot contain more than one level 2 indentures

_
B
o
x
2
b
● Enumeration must not contain Warnings or Cautions V
_
N
a
● A NOTE must not contain instructions, see Para. WARNING / CAUTION / NOTE. t
c
o
_
B
● A Subtask variant must not be empty

o
x
3
V
_
● A Warning/Caution is not permitted at the end of a Subtask, Ref. N

a
t
Para.WARNINGS/CAUTIONS c
o
_
B
o
● A Warning/Caution must precede the text to which it is applicable x

3
a
● A table or equation cannot be empty.

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
6 WARNINGS / CAUTIONS / NOTES

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
6.1 Definitions y
r
i
g
The “WARNING”: calls attention to the use of materials, processes, methods, tasks or limits which h
t
_
must be followed precisely to avoid injury or death to persons. F

o
o
t
e
The “CAUTION”: calls attention to methods and tasks which have to be followed to avoid damage
r
to equipment. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
6.2 Position 1
V
_
RULE: N
a
t
Warnings/Cautions must be positioned as follows: c

o
_
B
o
● Warnings are always positioned before Cautions.

x
1
a
V
_
● At task level, below the title; if they are applicable to the complete task. N
a
t
c
o
● At subtask level, directly below the title of the subtask to which they relate, if they are specific _
B
o
to the subtask. x
2
V
_
● At step level, directly above the text to which they relate, if they are specific to the step. N
a
t
c
o
● If the Warning/Caution is applicable to several steps of a subtask, it must be put at subtask

_
B
o
x
level. 2
a
● If the Warning/Caution is applicable to several steps in several subtasks, it must be put at

_
N
a
t
task level. c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
RULE: _
N
a
t
c
o
For A330NEO, refer to the Safety rules tool paragraph (** ON A330NEO ONLY). _
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
EXAMPLE x
3
a
TASK 29-13-00-440-801-A V
Reactivation of the Yellow Engine Hydraulic-Pump _

N
a
WARNING: OBEY THE HYDRAULIC SAFETY PROCEDURES. WORK ON THE HYDRAULIC t

c
o
SYSTEMS CAN BE DANGEROUS. _
B
o
WARNING: YOU MUST BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU DO WORK ON THE ENGINE PARTS AFTER x
3
THE ENGINE IS SHUTDOWN. THE ENGINE PARTS CAN STAY HOT FOR ALMOST 1 b
HOUR. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
WARNING: YOU MUST NOT TOUCH HOT PARTS WITHOUT APPLICABLE GLOVES. HOT _
D
o
PARTS CAN CAUSE AN INJURY. IF YOU GET AN INJURY, PUT IT IN COLD WATER c
_
C
FOR 10 MINUTES AND GET MEDICAL AID. o
p
y
CAUTION: YOU MUST NOT LET HYDRAULIC FLUID FALL ON THE ENGINE. YOU MUST r
i
REMOVE UNWANTED HYDRAULIC FLUID IMMEDIATELY WITH A CLEAN LINT-FREE g

h
t
CLOTH. THE HYDRAULIC FLUID CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SURFACE _

F
o
PROTECTION AND TO SOME PARTS. o
t
e
CAUTION: YOU MUST HOLD THE HOSE (S) WHEN YOU LOOSEN/TIGHTEN THE r
CONNECTIONS. MAKE SURE THAT THE HOSES CANNOT TWIST. DAMAGE TO THE V
_
N
HOSES CAN OCCUR IF THEY DO TWIST. a

t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
6.3 Creation V
_
N
a
RULE: t
c
o
Before sending a request to create a new Warning, Caution, make sure that it does not already exist _
B
o
in the database (see Note (1)). x
1
If the necessary Warning/Caution is missing, the author must send a request to the Warning/Caution a
database administrator (Use the UG1800601 Management of Warnings, Cautions and Typical _
N
a
Sentences in GIPSY and in DACAS Form available on the Linguistics and Human Factors e-site or t
c
o
community). _
B
o
x
2
Note (1): V
Go to the “Linguistics and Human Factors e-site!” in the HUB or on Airbus supply.
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
6.4 Warnings for Consumable Materials D
o
c
_
C
o
p
6.4.1 General Warning y
r
i
g
RULE: h
t
_
For all tasks that call up one or more consumable materials, only this Warning must be included at F
o
o
task level. No other Warnings concerning consumable materials are necessary because the operator t
e
must refer to the material manufacturer’s instructions (provided in the material safety data sheet) to r
apply the necessary precautions. _

N
a
t
c
o
WARNING (M001): BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE _
B
MATERIAL MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS. o

x
1
V
_
Example: N
a
t
TASK 78-32-45-400-804-A c
o
Installation of the Thrust Reverser Cowl Latches _

B
o
WARNING: BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS. OBEY THE MATERIAL x
1
a
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND YOUR LOCAL REGULATIONS. V
_
1. N
a
Reason for the Job t

c
o
Self explanatory _
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
6.4.2 Specific Warnings for the lockwire and the cotter pins o
_
B
o
x
RULE: 2
a
For a task that requires to remove and discard a cotter pin or lockwire, this Warning must be included V
_
just before the related step: N

a
t
- WARNING: USE GOGGLES EACH TIME YOU CUT A COTTER PIN. REMOVE AND c
o
_
DISCARD THE COTTER PIN IMMEDIATELY. B
o
x
- WARNING: USE PROTECTIVE GOGGLES AND GLOVES WHEN YOU REMOVE OR 2
b
INSTALL LOCKWIRE. EACH TIME YOU CUT LOCKWIRE DURING THE TASK, REMOVE V
_
AND DISCARD IT IMMEDIATELY. LOOSE LOCKWIRE CAN CUT YOU OR MAKE YOU N
a
t
BLIND, AND/OR CAN CAUSE DAMAGE. c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
Example for a cotter pin removal: a
t
c
WARNING: USE GOGGLES EACH TIME YOU CUT A COTTER PIN. REMOVE AND DISCARD THE o
_
COTTER PIN IMMEDIATELY. B

o
x
(4) Remove and discard the cotter pins (9) and (14). 3
a
(5) Remove the nut (8), the washer (7) and the bolt (11) and disengage the rod (10). V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
Example for lockwire removal: B

o
x
WARNING: USE PROTECTIVE GOGGLES AND GLOVES WHEN YOU REMOVE OR INSTALL 3
b
LOCKWIRE. EACH TIME YOU CUT LOCKWIRE DURING THE TASK, REMOVE AND DISCARD IT V
_
IMMEDIATELY. LOOSE LOCKWIRE CAN CUT YOU OR MAKE YOU BLIND, AND/OR CAN N
a
t
CAUSE DAMAGE. c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
(d) Remove and discard the lockwire from the nut (84) and the rod (77). _
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
6.5 Warning/Caution for referenced task i

g
h
t
RULE : _
F
o
When there is a cross-reference to another task, do not repeat Warnings/Cautions already quoted in o
t
e
the referenced task. r
V
_
N
a
t
6.6 Warning for CDCCL c
o
_
B
Critical Design Configuration Control Limitations (CDCCL): o
x
1
For scheduled maintenance source data with CDCCL requirement, specific Warnings are mandatory V
_
and they must be positioned at specific locations. The CDCCL Warnings are determined necessary N
a
to eliminate unsafe conditions as a result of maintenance actions, repairs or alterations throughout the t
c
o
operational life of the aircraft. _

B
o
These tasks can be scrutinized by the Airworthiness Authorities. x
1
To enable the identification of these tasks, a specific task attribute “CDCCL” will be automatically
a
associated to each task containing one of the CDCCL Warnings (Refer to the Task content attributes _
N
a
in WD1702476). t
c
o
_
B
o
RULE: x
2
● You must consult the SEME department, before you create/revise a task that has a CDCCL V
_
requirement N
a
t
c
o
● You must follow directives from the SEME department for the incorporation of these _
B
o
CDCCL Warnings. x
2
a
● The CDCCL Warnings must be put at a specific step of a task.

_
N
a
t
c
● Do not delete CDCCL Warnings with the attribute “dangerous” without the agreement of
o
_
B
o
the SEME department. x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
EXAMPLE: _
D
o
c
_
C
(2) Install the heat exchanger pipe-assembly (2) between RIB 23 and RIB 24: o
p
y
(a) Put the connector (39) in position on the heat exchanger pipe-assembly (1). r
i
g
h
t
WARNING: THIS INSTRUCTION IS APPLICABLE TO A CRITICAL DESIGN _

F
o
CONFIGURATION CONTROL LIMITATION (CDCCL). CAREFULLY OBEY o
t
e
ALL GIVEN INSTRUCTIONS WHEN YOU DO THIS STEP. IF YOU DO NOT r
OBEY THESE INSTRUCTIONS, A DANGEROUS CONDITION CAN OCCUR V

_
N
THAT CAN CAUSE A POSSIBLE FUEL TANK EXPLOSION. a

t
c
o
_
B
(b) Install the connector (39) to RIB 23 with the bolts (36) and the nuts (40) (Ref. AMM TASK o
x
20-28-00-912-803). 1
V
_
N
a
t
6.7 Warning related to component weight c

o
_
B
o
x
Refer to Paragraph 5.2.4 “Component Weight” 1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
6.8 Caution Related to Removable Structural Components (RSC) o

x
2
V
To help the operators to manage the Flight Hours/Flight Cycles recording at P/N level for _
N
a
RSCs, a specific CAUTION must be incorporated at the beginning of the t
c
o
removal/installation tasks of these removable components for all aircraft programs. _
B
o
The Caution has these codes and this wording: x
2
a
V
_
● A320 family: 1349 N
a
t
● A330/A340 programs: 1361 c
o
_
● A380 program: 1332 B
o
x
2
b
CAUTION: THIS PART IS A REMOVABLE STRUCTURAL COMPONENT (RSC), WHICH CAN BE MOVED V
_
BETWEEN AIRCRAFT. THUS IT CAN HAVE DIFFERENT OPERATION CONDITIONS AND A DIFFERENT N
a
t
LIFE RECORD (FLIGHT HOURS/FLIGHT CYCLES/CALENDAR) FROM THE AIRCRAFT IT IS INSTALLED c
o
ON OR REMOVED FROM. THE OPERATOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SPECIFIC TRACKING AND _
B
o
CONTINUED AIRWORTHINESS OF REMOVABLE STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS. INCORRECT x
3
MAINTENANCE OF THESE COMPONENTS CAN CAUSE A RISK FOR THE FLIGHT SAFETY. V
_
N
a
t
To enable the identification of these tasks, a specific task attribute “RSC” will be automatically c
o
_
associated to each task containing the RSC Caution (Refer to the Task content attributes in B
o
x
WD1702476). 3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
6.9 Note D
o
c
_
C
o
p
6.9.1 Definition y
r
i
g
The “NOTE”: calls attention to methods which make the job easier or provides supplementary or h
t
_
explanatory information. F
o
o
t
e
RULEs: r
● A Note must not contain instructions. _

N
● Cross-references are allowed in a Note for additional information but not to give an instruction.
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
6.9.2 Position 1
V
_
RULE: N
a
t
Notes must be located directly under the text to which they refer to and vertically in line with the text c
o
_
to which they apply. B
o
x
1
a
V
_
EXAMPLE: N
a
t
c
o
Install the batteries: _

B
o
1 Put the new IPC-CSN(25-65-51-01 ITEM 001) BATTERIES (3) in the cartridge (2). x
2
V
_
N
NOTE: The polarity indication is on the cartridge. a
t
… c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
7 Directives for specific tools (also called non-standard tools)

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
7.1 General Information y

r
i
g
When a maintenance task refers to a specific tool (GSE (Ground Support Equipment)), the instructions h
t
_
related to the operation of this tool must not be given in the maintenance task. They are given in the F
o
“GSE User guide”.

o
t
e
r
RULE: _
N
a
Specific tools references (or Part Numbers) in the maintenance tasks must be managed as follows: t
c
● Only one tool must be called out per application.

o
_
B
● It is not allowed to give the possibility to choose between a specific tool and a standard tool
o
x
1
for the same maintenance action. V

_
● The interchangeability of specific tools is not managed in the maintenance task. N

a
● Specific tools that are “No longer procurable” must be still referred to in maintenance tasks
t
c
o
_
because the operators that have them can still use them on the aircraft. Oldest part number B
o
must not be replaced by the new one. It is not allowed to add the tool in addition to the old x
1
a
one because the TEM (Tool and Equipment Manual) manages the interchangeability. V
● Specific tools that are “No longer usable” must be removed from maintenance tasks and from
_
N
a
t
the TEM c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
7.2 Alternative Tool Part Number _

C
o
p
y
r
i
g
Rule: If you cannot apply the above mentioned rules due to obsolescence or interchangeability of tools for a given maintenance action, you
h
t
must request the GSE/Tools department to create an Alternative Tool Part Number. _
F
o
o
t
The alternative tool part number is an “invariant” Part Number (identified by ALTXXXXXXX) used to make the link between the maintenance
e
r
V
task and the TEM where all the specific tools applicable for this task are listed. It is tagged in the maintenance task, replacing the specific
_
N
tool part number. In the TEM, this invariant will give the list of all tools that can be used for the given maintenance action.
a
t
c
NOTE: This is not applicable for a specific tool which is no longer procurable because the TEM manages the interchangeability. o
_
B
o
x
1
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
8 Directive specific to attaching parts

_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
8.1 Bolts, Nuts, Washers h

t
_
F
o
o
t
8.1.1 Safetying e
r
Safetying is used to prevent unwanted movement or loosening of fasteners, connectors, unions or _

N
a
parts that turn. t

c
o
_
B
o
Indicate exact method of safetying and when the safetying device must be discarded. x
1
V
_
Discarded safetying parts (such as nuts, cotter pins) are covered in the IPC and their basic CSN must N
a
t
be indicated and will be used for processing. c
o
_
B
o
The safetying parts must be identified in the illustration. x

1
a
V
_
NOTE: N
a
t
Self-locking nuts are to be discarded when the Design Office specifies that the nut must be used once c
o
only. In all other situations the renewal of self-locking nuts is at the discretion of the mechanic. _
B
o
x
2
Lockwire is a consumable material and is covered by the CML. It is systematically discarded. V

_
N
a
t
NOTE: c
o
_
Select the lock wire diameter according to the Design drawing. The methods for installing the lock B
o
x
wire are given in AMM 20-11-00. Do not make a cross-reference. 2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
8.1.2 Torque D
o
c
_
C
See Paragraph 5.4.10. Torque value o

p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
8.1.3 Washers t
e
r
V
On illustrations, the Location of washers must be indicated accurately. _
N
a
t
c
On the same bolt, the washer located beneath the head may be of a different type from that Located o
_
B
under the nut and must be indicated on the appropriate illustration with different annotation numbers. o
x
1
V
_
EXAMPLE: N
a
t
c
o
Subtask 71-00-51-420-002-A _
B
o
D. Installation of the Power Plant x
1
…
a
3) Connect the engine front mount to the pylon interface. _

N
a
(a) Install the bolts (3) and (5). t
c
o
(Ref. Fig. Removal/Installation of the Forward and the Aft Mounts SHEET 1) (Ref. Fig. _
B
o
Removal/Installation of the Forward and the Aft Mounts SHEET 2) x
2
1 Install the washers (4) and (6), the brackets assy (7), the bolts (3) and (5). V
_
2 Install the washers (4) and (6), the brackets assy (8), the nuts (9) and (11). N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
9 Directives specific to MP Illustrations

_
D
o
c
_
All the illustrations must be in compliance with the rules given in the Technical Publications C
o
p
Illustration Guides. y
r
i
There are two types of illustrations: g
h
● 2D illustrations: t
_
F
The 2D illustrations must be in compliance with the rules given in the Technical o
o
t
Publications Illustration Guide PRD0063.0 completed with: e
r
● PRD0063.2: 2-D Illustrations V

_
N
a
t
● 3D animations c
o
_
For 3D animations, refer to the documents that follow: TDG B
o
● TDS0061: 3D Animation Product Definition

x
1
● TDG0121: IWDS W3D user guide V

_
N
● UG1700262: 3D Preparation for Animation User Guide a

t
c
● UG1700514: Rapid Manual User Guide o
_
● TDS0055: 3D Graphic data styles specification

B
o
x
1
a
V
_
9.1 Item identification N
a
t
c
Use sequential numerical identification numbers starting at the top left hand corner turning clockwise. o
_
B
If helpful, fixed structure and/or components which remain installed may be identified by their o
x
nomenclature. 2
V
_
N
a
If several illustrations or details are required to illustrate the same operation, numbering must be t
c
o
continuous, with a break in the sequence between each illustration. For the initial issue, the break in _
B
the sequencing must be 10 (Refer to 2-D Illustrations Product Definition). o

x
2
a
V
Identical parts must be identified on all illustrations for a given task or removal/installation tasks with _
N
a
the same item number. t
c
o
_
B
In exceptional cases: When the illustration is not sufficiently detailed to visually identify a unit or o
x
2
component with precision, the identification number may be preceded by the designation of the unit b
V
or component. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
9.2 Rules for Revised Illustrations Applicable for All Aircraft D
o
c
Programs _
C
o
p
For a revised illustration, the latest standard must be applied as follows: y

r
i
● For a single sheet figure solution, if there are technical changes, the sheet must be compliant g
h
t
with the latest rules. _
F
● For multi-sheet illustrations: o

o
t
o If less than 50% of the sheets are impacted by the technical change, only the e
r
impacted sheets must be compliant with the latest rules. V

_
o If 50% or more sheets are impacted by the technical change, all the sheets must be
N
a
t
compliant with the latest rules. c

o
_
NOTE: B
o
x
In case of any doubt or problem, an analysis could be done by the Airbus TDE or Illustrator on a case 1
V
by case basis. _
N
a
t
c
For revised tasks, if the technical change has an impact on the text and not on the illustration, it is not o
_
B
requested to update the illustration to the latest rules. o
x
1
a
V
_
9.3 Specific Rules for A330 Beluga XL Illustrations N
a
t
c
During the A330 Beluga XL development phase, 3D products were used extensively to create the o
_
B
applicable illustrations. Additionally, AMM tasks that apply to both programs A330 and Beluga XL o
x
2
show A330 illustrations without any particular modification for Beluga XL (locator, e.g. small aircraft V
depiction…) and this rule will apply in the future. _

N
a
t
c
o
For the Beluga XL program, there is not a complete set of Central Illustration Standards Library (CISL) _
B
o
objects as for the other aircraft programs. General views will be created and added to CISL, and x
2
specific views will be produced only on request from authoring lines. a
V
_
N
a
No retrofit on the existing Beluga XL illustrations must be done with no technical reason (MOD, SB, t
c
COC…).
o
_
B
Existing figures must not be revised for the sole purpose of applying a new/updated rule. o
x
2
b
For new illustrations, PRD0063.0 “2-D Illustrations Product Definition“ must be applied but no highlight
V
_
N
a
and hotspot are required for the Beluga XL specific part. t
c
o
_
B
For example, screenshots from 3D products are authorized with the colors defined in the PRD. o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
9.4 Rule for Sharklets/Wingtips o
_
B
o
x
3
a
9.4.1 Rule for A320 family illustrations: Sharklets / Wingtips V

_
N
A320CEO (Current Engine Option) can be equipped with Sharklets. a

t
c
o
_
B
All A320NEO (New Engine Option) are equipped with Sharklets. o
x
3
b
RULE: V
_
N
● Do not create a variant solution and a new illustration just to cover the Sharklets on the a
t
c
Aircraft Locator, when the main subject is not the Sharklet. o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
● For new illustrations created for the A320CEO having Sharklets, the Aircraft Locator must c
_
C
reflect the Sharklets. o
p
y
r
i
● For all illustrations created for the A320NEO, the Aircraft Locator must reflect the Sharklets. g
h
t
_
F
o
● For existing illustrations that must be revised and that are applicable to both CEO& NEO o
t
e
versions then, the Aircraft Locator can reflect the Wingtips or the Sharklets. The choice is at r
the discretion of the Technical Data Engineer. V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
9.4.2 Rule for A330 family illustrations: Sharklets or Wingtips x

1
All A330CEO (Current Engine Option) are equipped with Wingtips. _

N
a
t
c
o
All A330NEO (New Engine Option) are equipped with Sharklets. _
B
o
x
1
RULE: a
● Do not create a variant solution and a new illustration just to cover the Sharklets on the _
N
a
Aircraft Locator, when the main subject is not the Sharklet. t
c
o
_
B
● For all illustrations created for the A330NEO, the Aircraft Locator must reflect the Sharklets. o
x
2
●
_
For existing illustrations that must be revised and that are applicable to both CEO& NEO N
a
t
versions then, the Aircraft Locator can reflect the Wingtips or the Sharklets. The choice is at c
o
_
the discretion of the Technical Data Engineer. B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
10 FIN – Equipment (LRU), semi-equipment (LRI), and Circuit Breaker

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
10.1 FIN Definition y

r
i
g
h
t
_
Mechanical and electrical components are identified on the aircraft by a unique identifier F
o
o
called FIN (Functional Item Number) located on a label on the component. t
e
r
The FIN is unique: it corresponds to one component with one function at one location. V
The FIN allows the end-users to quickly retrieve the data (such as MP, Illustrated Part _
N
a
catalog (IPC), Wiring) in the Airbus documentation. t

c
o
_
B
o
RULES: x
1
● In a removal / installation task, the FIN(s) of each LRU/LRI must be tagged at task V
_
level. N
a
● For software uploading, it is mandatory to tag the FINs of the hardware components
t
c
o
_
at task level. B
o
● You must tag only the FIN(s) of the LRU(s)/LRI(s) that is(are) impacted by the task. x
1
a
For a LRI, only the FIN of the LRI must be tagged, not the FIN(s) of the LRU(s). V
_
If a LRI does not have a FIN, then do not tag any FIN. N
a
t
c
o
_
NOTE: B
o
All the FIN(s) related to the task are entered at invariant level and configuration is x
2
managed automatically by the finalization tool. V

_
N
a
t
c
EXAMPLE of FINs tagged at task level o
_
TASK 34-11-15-000-801-A B
o
x
Removal of the Multifunction Probes 2
a
FIN: 3FP1 3FP2 3FP3 V

_
N
a
t
EXAMPLE of circuit breaker tagged in the circuit breaker table: c

o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
10.2 Generic FINs: D
o
c
_
C
o
p
Generic FINs are FINs that replace a large number of FINs with the same prefix but with different y
r
suffixes. i
g
h
The creation of a generic FIN in the ACDB, also called FIN family, is authorized when the FIN has t
_
F
more than 10 suffixes. o
o
t
The FIN form FM1502546 must be properly filled (refer to UG1501284.3) and sent to the generic e
r
address administration.tdfin@airbus.com to create the generic FIN in the ACDB. V

_
N
a
t
They are usually used for cabin-related data involving a large number of similar components, to avoid c
o
_
large numbers of variants for texts and illustrations and provide a clear and orderly structure to make B
o
the task easy to understand. x

1
V
_
N
EXAMPLE of generic FIN 5060ME*: a
t
c
o
_
Generic FIN 5060ME* will replace all these FIN suffixes: B

o
x
5060ME190MA 5060ME210MB 5060ME210MF 5060ME320MB 5060ME320MF 5060ME340MA 1

a
5060ME340MG 5060ME350MF 5060ME360MB 5060ME390MB 5060ME390MF 5060ME570MB V

_
N
5060ME580MF 5060ME750MB 5060ME750MF 5060ME790MB 5060ME790MF 5060ME930MB a
t
5060ME930MF c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
TASK 25-26-51-000-801-A _
N
a
t
c
Removal of the Main and Lower Deck Curtains o

_
B
FIN: 5060ME* o
x
2
a
V
_
10.3 Aircraft Component Data Base (ACDB) N
a
t
c
Each circuit breaker and FIN has its own effectivity through a MPM/MP combination given by the o
_
B
Design Office. o
x
2
RULE: b
V
If a FIN must be created because a LRU or LRI is installed by a SB only or through a COC, the author _
N
a
must use the dedicated form FM0900912 and send it to the Tech data Aircraft Component Data Base t
c
o
(ACDB) administrator through the generic address DL-TD-FIN. _
B
The Tech Data ACDB administrator is in charge to create the FIN in ACDB with the related criteria. o
x
3
After incorporation, the author must wait for the ACDB variant calculation. V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
10.4 General overview of circuit breaker management D
o
c
_
C
The author tags a circuit breaker invariant and the system displays all the valid solutions for each o
p
y
circuit breaker. Each solution has its own effectivity. r
i
g
h
t
_
F
10.4.1 865 subtask type o

o
t
e
RULE: r
V
_
For the effectivity of a circuit breaker solution: N

a
t
c
● The effectivity of the subtask -865- is always ALL aircraft. Therefore it is forbidden to o
_
B
have several variants of the same Subtask -865-. o

x
1
● During the data assembly, only the circuit breaker effectivity is taken into account in V
_
Subtask -865-. N
a
NOTE: t
c
o
The data assembly tool takes into account only the first variant of the subtask 865. Any circuit breaker _
B
o
contained in another variant will be lost. x
1
a
A Typical Sentence is mandatory before the Circuit Breaker Table that must always be in a dedicated _
N
a
t
subtask with Function Code 865. c

o
_
B
o
x
2
EXAMPLES: (this list is not exhaustive) V

_
N
a
t
CB1: Open safety and tag this (these) circuit breaker(s): c
o
_
CB2: Make sure that this (these) circuit breaker(s) is (are) open safetied and tagged: B
o
CB3: Remove the safety clip(s) and the tag(s) and close this (these) circuit breaker(s): x
2
a
CB4: Make sure that this (these) circuit breaker(s) is (are) closed. V
_
To find the correct sentence per aircraft program, refer to Typical Sentences. N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
10.4.2 Specific case: 875 subtask type D
o
c
_
865 subtasks are not managed in configuration. C
o
p
875 subtasks are used when it is needed to manage the configuration of a circuit breaker subtask. y
r
i
g
h
RULE : t
_
F
o
o
●
t
875 subtask must be used only when the task requires a circuit breaker for a specific e
r
usage : e.g: isolate a circuit by a circuit breaker for one task and only for a specific V
_
aircraft configuration. N
a
t
● Make sure that the circuit breaker is in ACDB with the correct configuration. The c
o
_
applicability of the subtask 875 must be covered by the applicability of the circuit B
o
breaker in the ACDB. x

1
● Make a permanent scrutiny of the configuration management for this subtask for each V
_
N
new AMM revision a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
EXAMPLE: _
D
o
c
_
C
The applicability of the circuit breaker 4GG is applicable to ALL Manufacturer Serial Numbers (MSNs). o
p
y
To display it only for one configuration (i.e.: bogie landing gear configuration), the 875 subtask is used. r
i
If 865 subtask was used, the test would be not achievable. g

h
t
_
F
o
SUBTASK 32-47-00-875-XXXXX-001 o
t
e
r

_
N
a
c
o
_
B
o
x
121VU HYDRAULIC/BRK/TEMP/DET/UNIT 1GW M37 1
V
_
121VU HYDRAULIC/BRK/TEMP/DET/UNIT 1GW M26 N
a
t
c
Variant 002 has a limited effectivity o
_
SUBTASK 32-47-00-875-XXXXX-002 Variant 002 = Variant 001 + Circuit breaker 4GG B
o
x
1
a

_
N
PANEL DESIGNATION FIN LOCATION a
t
c
o
_
B
o
121VU HYDRAULIC/BRAKING 4GG M36 x

2
AND STEERING/SYS2/SPLY V
_
N
a
121VU HYDRAULIC/BRAKING 4GG M25 t
c
AND STEERING/SYS2/SPLY o
_
B
o
121VU HYDRAULIC/BRK/TEMP/DET/UNIT 1GW M37 x

2
a
121VU HYDRAULIC/BRK/TEMP/DET/UNIT 1GW M26 V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
10.5 Circuit Breakers in the Text V

_
N
a
In the paragraph Job Set-Up (Para.3.) circuit breakers must be referred to and listed in tables. in a t
c
o
Subtask with Function Code 865 _
B
o
x
3
Table heading consists of: a
V
_
N
●
a
PANEL: Referring to panel number where the circuit breaker is located. t
c
● DESIGNATION: Placard designation. o

_
B
● FIN: Circuit breaker FIN. o

x
3
● LOCATION: Panel grid reference. b
V
_
N
The writer must give only the FIN of the breakers to be open. The system will extract the other a
t
c
information from the circuit breaker file (ACDB). o

_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
RULE: c
_
C
The circuit breaker table must always be located in Subtask -865-. Otherwise, single circuit breaker o
p
y
may be called in other subtasks. r
i
g
h
t
_
EXAMPLE F
o
o
3. Job Set-up t
e
Subtask 24-21-42-860-002-A r
A. Aircraft Maintenance Configuration _

N
…
a
t
c
o
Subtask 24-21-42-865-001-A _
B
o
x
1
Open, safety/lock and tag this (these) circuit breaker (s): V

_
N
a
t
PANEL DESIGNATION FIN LOCATION c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
FOR FIN 1XU1 V
_
N
2502VU GGPCU 1 6XU1 3559 a
t
c
o
_
RULE: B
o
x
In the paragraph Close-up (Para.5.) all the circuit breakers that have been opened in the Job Set-Up 2
V
must be listed to be closed, in a Subtask with Function Code 865. _
N
a
It is mandatory to list all the circuit breakers to be closed in a Circuit Breaker Table, as in the Job Set- t
c
Up. o
_
B
o
x
2
EXAMPLE: a
V
_
N
5. Close-up a
t
c
Subtask 24-24-00-865-012-A o
_
B
Remove the tag(s) and/or the SAFETY CLIP-CIRCUIT BREAKER and close/unlock this (these) circuit o
x
2
breaker(s): b
V
_
N
PANEL DESIGNATION FIN LOCATION a
t
c
o
2502VU SOLENOID 2 SUPPLY 14XE 2049 _
B
o
2502VU SOLENOID 1 SUPPLY 13XE 2149 x
3
V
_
N
To open or close circuit breakers in other paragraphs (for example in the ACTION/RESULT tables): a
t
o CbOpen to open a circuit breaker

c
o
_
o CbClose to close a circuit breaker. B

o
x
3
a
RULE: V
_
N
The FORFIN tag is used to manage circuit breakers for specific equipment (FIN). In finalization the a
t
text FOR FIN XX (FIN designation) will be shown. c

o
_
B
o
x
RULE: 3
b
FORFIN tag must be in circuit breaker table. V

_
N
a
t
RULE: c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
For common circuit breaker do not use FOR FIN. _

D
o
c
_
C
RULE : o
p
y
Management of the circuit breaker opening/closing sequence in specific order: r
i
Each time there is a need to manage the circuit breaker opening/closing sequence in specific order: g
h
t
_
F
o
● Add a WARNING or CAUTION describing the risk (personal or material) before the o
t
e
circuit breaker table, r
V
_
N
● Use Typical Sentence to open circuit breakers: Open, safety/lock and tag these circuit a
t
c
breakers in this sequence: o
_
B
> For A320 Family, TS CB18 o
x
> For A330/A340 programs, TS CB12 1
> For A380 program, TS CB5. _

N
a
t
c
o
or _
B
o
x
1
● Add Typical Sentence to close circuit breakers: Remove the safety clips and tags and a
V
close these circuit breakers in this sequence _
N
a
t
c
> For A320 Family, TS CB19 o

_
B
> For A330/A340 programs, TS CB13 o

x
2
> For A380 program, TS CB6 V
_
N
a
● Tag the circuit breakers in the appropriate sequence order. t

c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
EXAMPLE: _
D
o
c
_
C
SUBTASK 73-11-41-875-XXXXX-001 o
p
y
r
i
g
C. Open, safety and tag these circuit breakers: h
t
WARNING: OPEN CIRCUIT BREAKERS 1QG1(2) AND 2QG1(2) BEFORE YOU OPEN _
F
o
CIRCUIT BREAKER 1KC1(2). o

t
e
IF NOT THE LP FUEL VALVE WILL OPEN AND THERE IS A RISK THAT FUEL FLOW OUT. r
V
_
N
a
c
o
_
B
o
x
742VU FUEL LP MOT 1 ENG1 1QG1 K75 1
V
_
742VU FUEL LP MOT 1 ENG1 1QG1 K77 N

a
t
c
722VU FUEL LP MOT 2 ENG1 2QG1 U44 o
_
B
o
722VU FUEL LP MOT 2 ENG1 2QG1 U45 x
1
a
742VU HP FUEL SOV ENG1 1KC1 E67 V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
11 Specific directives for scheduled maintenance tasks (MPD tasks)

_
C
o
p
y
r
For specific rules for structural and zonal tasks, please refer to UG2100280.9 Structural i
g
h
Scheduled Maintenance Tasks and TDG0037.10 MPD Zonal Tasks. t

_
F
o
o
t
e
11.1 MPD Definition and Scope r
V
_
N
a
t
11.1.1 MPD Definition for all aircraft programs except for A330 Beluga XL c
o
_
B
o
The Maintenance Planning Document (MPD) gives information about scheduled maintenance tasks. x
1
It is used by the operators to build their customized scheduled maintenance program. V

_
The MPD tasks give the essential instructions necessary to perform maintenance actions as required N
a
t
by the EASA/FAA Certification Specification CS 25.1529 (Instructions for Continued Airworthiness). c
o
_
The MPD is not an approved document. It is an Airbus envelope repository document and covers B
o
repetitive maintenance tasks required or recommended by different source documents. x

1
a
V
_
Further to the MPD simplification project, the MPD document shows only the scheduled maintenance N
a
t
tasks which have these main sources: c
o
● Maintenance Review Board Report (MRBR), _

B
o
● Airworthiness Limitation Sections (ALS), x
2
● Certification Maintenance Requirements (CMR) / Configuration, Maintenance and V

_
N
procedures (CMP). a
t
c
o
_
It does not show any more scheduled maintenance tasks which have these additional sources: B
o
● Inspection Service Bulletin (ISB),

x
2
a
● Vendor Service Bulletin (VSB), V

_
● Airbus all Operator Telex (AOT), N

a
t
● Airworthiness Directive (AD) c
o
● In-Service Information (ISI) article.

_
B
o
x
2
b
This correspondence table makes it possible to know when an AMM task is necessary depending V
_
on the MPD source: N
a
● Every combination of MPD source is possible

t
c
o
● If a combination contains one of the main MPD source, it must have an AMM task.
_
B
o
● MPD tasks based only on additional source are not released in the MPD document (further x
3
to MPD simplification) but are kept in the MPD database. Consequently, the corresponding V
_
N
AMM tasks must be kept. a
t
● If the source is only an ISB, an AMM task must not be created.

c
o
_
B
o
x
3
MPD source MPD source type "Simplified" MPD AMM task a
V
Yes with the MPD reference in _
N
MRBR Main Yes the Reason for the Job a

t
c
Yes with the MPD reference in o

_
B
ALS/AJD Main Yes the Reason for the Job o
x
3
Yes with the MPD reference in b
V
CMP/CMR Main Yes the Reason for the Job _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Yes with the MPD reference in _

D
o
ISI Additional No the Reason for the Job c

_
C
Yes with the MPD reference in o

p
y
AOT Additional No the Reason for the Job r
i
g
ISB Additional No No h
t
_
F
VSB Additional No No o
o
AD if referring to t
e
r
ISB/VSB only Additional No No V

_
AD if referring to Yes with the MPD reference in N

a
t
Main MPD source Additional No the Reason for the Job c
o
_
LUR N/A Yes No B

o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
11.1.2 MPD Definition for A330 Beluga XL D
o
c
_
C
In the frame of the SMAPS initiative (Scheduled Maintenance and Associated Procedures o
p
y
Synchronization), an adapted way of working has been defined in order to secure the data r
i
g
exchanged between SIM and SID to achieve the objective of having synchronized publication of h
t
_
Scheduled Maintenance documentation (MRD and ALS Parts) and AMM and NTM tasks. F
o
o
t
e
It is important to mention that there will not be a MPD document and, therefore, no link between r
V
MEDAS and IMS-PA. Therefore, the synchronization meetings and the data exchange will be very _
N
important in this program. a

t
c
o
_
B
o
11.2 MPD task definition x

1
V
_
N
a
The definition of the different MPD task types are: t

c
o
_
B
o
DISCARD (DIS): The removal from service of an item at a specified life limit. x
1
a
FUNCTIONAL CHECK (FNC): A quantitative check to determine if one or more functions of an item _
N
a
performs within specified limits. t
c
o
_
B
GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION (GVI): A visual examination of an interior or exterior area, o

x
2
installation or assembly to detect obvious damage, failure or irregularity. This level of inspection is V
_
made from within touching distance unless otherwise specified. A mirror may be necessary to ensure N
a
t
visual access to all surfaces in the inspection area. This level of inspection is made under normally c
o
available lighting conditions such as daylight, hangar lighting, flashlight or drop-light and may require _
B
o
removal or opening of access panels or doors. Stands, ladders or platforms may be required to gain x
2
a
proximity to the area being checked. Basic cleaning may be required to ensure appropriate visibility. V
_
N
a
DETAILED INSPECTION (DET): An intensive visual examination of a specific structural area, t

c
o
system, installation or assembly to detect damage, failure or irregularity. This could include tactile _
B
o
assessment in which a component or assembly can be checked for tightness/security. Available x
2
b
lighting is normally supplemented with a direct source of good lighting at an intensity deemed V
appropriate. Inspection aids such as mirrors, magnifying lenses may be necessary. Surface cleaning _
N
a
and elaborate access tasks may be required. t

c
o
_
B
o
SPECIAL DETAILED INSPECTION (SDI): An intensive examination of a specific item, installation, x
3
or assembly to detect damage, failure or irregularity. The examination is likely to make extensive V
_
use of specialized Inspection Techniques and/or equipment. Intricate cleaning and substantial N
a
t
access or disassembly task may be required. c
o
_
B
o
LUBRICATION AND SERVICING (LUB/SVC): Any act of lubricating or servicing for the purpose of x
3
a
maintaining inherent design capabilities. V
_
N
a
t
OPERATIONAL CHECK (OPC): An operational check is a task to determine that an item is fulfilling c
o
its intended purpose. Does not require quantitative tolerances. This is a failure finding task. _
B
o
x
3
b
RESTORATION (RST): That work necessary to return the item to a specific standard. Restoration V
_
may vary from cleaning or replacement of single parts up to a complete overhaul. N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
VISUAL CHECK (VCK): A visual check is an observation to determine that an item is fulfilling its _
D
o
intended purpose. Does not require quantitative tolerances. This is a failure finding task. c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
11.3 Correspondence table between the MPD task code and the F
o
o
t
AMM function code e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
This table gives the AMM function code to be used depending on the MPD task code. _
B
These rules are only applicable for new AMM tasks. o

x
1
For existing AMM tasks, if the MPD task code is changed and the AMM task is related to the removal V
_
of a component for a workshop maintenance, do not change the AMM function code 920 (do not N
a
t
create a new task and do not delete the existing one). c
o
If for existing AMM tasks, if the MPD task code and the content of the MPD requirements are _
B
o
x
changed (for example, a GVI is replaced by a Detailed Inspection (DET)), the MPD task reference 1
a
must be removed from the "Reason for the job" of the existing AMM task. A new AMM task with the V
_
N
applicable function code must be created with this MPD task reference in the "Reason for the job" a
t
c
and with the new instructions to be in line with the MPD requirements. o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
AMTOSS Task code from Task Data AMM page Function Code AMM N
a
t
Sheet (MSG-3) block c
o
_
B
DET = Detailed Inspection MP06 220 Detailed/Dimensional Inspection/Check o
x
2
DIS = Discard MP04 920 Scheduled Replacement a
V
_
FNC = Functional Check MP05 720 Functional N

a
t
c
GVI = General Visual Inspection MP06 210 General Visual Inspection/Check o
_
B
o
x
2
LUB = Lubrication MP03 640 Lubricating b
V
_
OPC = Operational Check MP05 710 Operational N

a
t
c
RST = Restoration MP07 100 Cleaning o
_
B
o
SDI= Special Detailed Inspection MP06 280 Specific/Special Inspection/Check x
3
SVC = Servicing MP03 610 Servicing V

_
N
a
VCK = Visual Check MP06 210 General Visual Inspection/Check t
c
o
_
** BITE Test MP05 740 BITE Test B
o
x
3
** Removal for workshop MP04 920 Scheduled Replacement a
maintenance V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
NOTE: ** independently of the MPD task code b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
11.4 General Rules for MPD Tasks D
o
c
_
C
o
p
The maintenance task must cover the requirements requested by the MPD task with the y
r
associated Scheduled Maintenance source data (MSG3 task data sheet, ALS2 data i
g
h
sheet, ALS3 to 5 Maintenance Task Description). t

_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
11.4.1 Reason for the Job _
N
a
t
RULE: c
o
_
● The “Reason for the Job” paragraph must refer to the associated MPD task reference and B
o
x
title. 1
V
_
N
NOTE: a
t
c
o
If the MPD task reference is not created in the workflow tool IMS-PA because of the Synchronized _
B
o
x
Maintenance And Associated Procedure Synchronization (SMAPS) project, the “Reason for the Job” 1
a
V
_
paragraph must contain the MPD reference in free text. N
a
t
But as soon as the new MPD reference is available in IMS-PA, the “Reason for the Job” must be
c
o
_
B
o
revised to replace the MPD task reference in free text by the related MPD tag. x
2
V
_
N
a
Specific rules for Beluga XL: t
c
● For all the AMM scheduled maintenance task solutions applicable to Beluga XL ( A330-700L), o
_
B
it is necessary to put the MRD reference or the ALS reference in free text in the Reason for the o
x
2
Job. a
V
_
N
a
t
11.4.2 Job Set-up c
o
_
B
o
x
2
If the information related to the job set-up given in the Scheduled Maintenance source b
data (zone, access, aircraft maintenance configuration, preparation…) are not V

_
N
appropriate or erroneous, it is under the AMM author responsibility to adapt the job a
t
c
set-up. o
_
B
o
x
In addition, the Scheduled Maintenance source data does not necessarily include all the 3
steps of the aircraft preparation and access requirements. In that case, the additional _
N
a
steps necessary for the task must be identified and added in the job set-up by the t
c
o
AMM author. _
B
o
x
3
However, if the AMM author detects that the necessary additional steps represent a a
V
significant workload for the operator (for example: removal of a significant equipment, _
N
a
removal of a lot of components (for example: all the air-conditioning ducts in a given t
c
area)), the author/Airbus TDE must send a TechRequest SDR to the Maintenance o
_
B
Program organization. o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
11.4.3 Procedure D
o
c
_
C
o
p
The Scheduled Maintenance source data describes the main steps of the procedure y
r
i
paragraph which are necessary to satisfy the scheduled maintenance requirements. g
h
t
The author must detail the maintenance instructions in line with these requirements. _
F
o
o
t
e
The maintenance task must cover nothing more, nothing less than the requirements of the r
V
_
scheduled maintenance source data. This is to avoid over-maintenance (risk of N
a
t
maintenance errors) or increased maintenance costs. If the Engineering department or the c
o
_
customer wants to add inspection, servicing, lubrication, component removal or test B
o
x
requirements, it is necessary to contact the Tech Data Program Manager (SIDBB) and the 1
Maintenance Program Manager (SIME) before taking these additional requirements into _
N
a
account. t
c
o
_
B
o
x
If the AMM author detects that the task content of the scheduled maintenance source data 1
a
is not feasible or that the steps are not in the correct sequence, the Airbus TDE must be V
_
contacted for analysis and if needed, a TechRequest SDR must be sent to the Maintenance
N
a
t
c
Program Engineering Department (SIME). o

_
B
o
x
2
If, to satisfy a request from the Design Office or a supplier, or to implement a Mod, an SB or V
_
N
a TechRequest, you must modify the AMM procedure paragraph with an impact on the a
t
c
initial intent of the scheduled maintenance requirement (for example addition or o
_
B
modification of the component inspection/servicing/lubrication/removal/test), you must o
x
2
request the agreement of the Maintenance Program Engineering Department (SIME). a
To do this, the Airbus TDE must send a TechRequest SDR to the Maintenance Program _
N
a
t
Engineering Department (SIME) with this information: c
o
● MPD task reference and MPD source reference (MRBR, ALS)

_
B
o
● AMM task reference

x
2
b
● MOD, SB or TechRequest reference or Design Office/supplier request. V

_
N
a
t
c
Even if the MPD source data will be updated at the opportunity of a future working group, if o
_
B
you have received the agreement from the Maintenance Program Engineering Department o
x
3
(SIME) to modify the AMM task: V

_
N
o The revision of the task must be done a
t
c
o The TechRequest PWO must be linked to the Authoring Work Order (AWO) o
_
B
o The "Scheduled Maintenance Verification" step must be selected in the related

o
x
3
a
work order whatever the source of the MPD task is. V
_
N
a
t
However, if the modification of the AMM procedure paragraph does not change the initial c
o
_
intent of the scheduled maintenance requirement, the agreement from the Maintenance B
o
x
Program Engineering Department is not necessary. 3

b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
11.4.4 MPD Rules: D
o
c
_
● The maintenance task title must be the same as the MPD task title (do not apply STE C
o
p
rules). y
r
● The AMM task related to the MPD must contain only instructions related to the MPD, i
g
h
nothing less, nothing more. t

_
F
● If a request from the Design Office, suppliers, customers or any external parties (Mod, o
o
SB, TechRequest,…) has an impact on an AMM task related to an MPD task, you
t
e
r
must ask SEME department for their agreement before you modify the AMM task. V
_
This is to make sure that the AMM task remains in line with the MPD requirements. N
a
t
● Each MPD task must be covered by one AMM task. It is not allowed to use the same c
o
_
AMM task to cover several MPD tasks even if the requirements are the same. B
o
● The maintenance task must be authored in the Page Block related to the title of the x
1
MPD task: such as MP03 for Lubrication task, MP06 for Inspection/Check task. V
_
N
● The MPD tasks that have ISB (Inspection Service Bulletin) source only, must not be a
t
c
incorporated in maintenance task even if the ISB is mandated by an Airworthiness o
_
Directive (AD). The instructions for these tasks are in the ISB and must not be B
o
x
duplicated in AMM. 1
a
● When the MPD task includes actions to be done in the workshop (MPD description: V
_
“Remove the equipment for the “inspection/check… in shop”), do not make a cross-
N
a
t
reference to the CMM: c

o
_
> The AMM task code must be 920 whatever the MPD task code. B
o
x
> The subtask title in the Procedure paragraph must be “Removal/Installation of 2
[the equipment] for workshop maintenance”

V
_
N
> The MP must give these instructions: a

t
c
A. Removal/Installation of [the equipment] for workshop maintenance o

_
B
1) Remove [the equipment] + cross-reference to the related Removal task o
x
2
2) Send the [equipment] to the workshop. a
3) Install a serviceable [equipment] + cross-reference to the related V

_
N
Installation task a
t
c
o
_
B
EXAMPLE: o
x
2
b
4.Procedure V
_
N
Subtask 25-xx-xx-xxxxxxxxx a
t
c
A. Replacement of the escape slide for workshop maintenance. o
_
1) Remove the escape slide, Ref Task 25-……. B

o
x
2) Send the escape slide to the workshop. 3
V
3) Install a serviceable escape slide. Ref Task 25-……. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
11.5 Deletion of MPD tasks 3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
RULES: o
_
B
● Deletion of an AMM task (MP) related to an MPD task is allowed only if the MPD o
x
3
event has the status 02 in IMS-PA. b
● When an MPD task is deleted from the MPD (status 02 in IMS-PA), the associated
V
_
N
maintenance task must stay available a minimum of three years after the deletion of a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
the MPD task. This is to make sure that the maintenance task is not deleted before _
D
o
the operators receive the new MPD revision. c

_
C
● If an MPD task is deleted, it is necessary to delete the MPD reference tag from the o
p
y
reason for the job of the task or the variants of the task. This is to ensure that the r
i
AMM reference is no more sent to the MPD (stop the link between DACAS and g
h
t
MEDAS). Then, you must always check if the AMM task is not called by another _
F
o
maintenance task (AMM or TSM). If it is not called by another maintenance task, set o
t
the AMM task to “Not Publish” or set to “N”.

e
r
If an MPD task variant is deleted, refer to this flow chart: V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
NOTE: For A330/A340 family, there are two separate MPD documents, one for A330 and one for o
_
B
A340. When you check if all the MPD variants are deleted, you must check in both the A330 MPD o
x
and the A340 MPD. 2

b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
11.6 Specific rules for MPD tasks with EWIS (Electrical Wiring D
o
c
Interconnection System) _
C
o
p
EWIS is mentioned in brackets in the MPD task title description. y

r
i
g
h
t
_
F
RULE: o
o
t
e
When the EWIS (Electrical Wiring Interconnection System) is mentioned in the MPD task r
description, the following Note must be added at the beginning of the AMM-tasks after the MPD _
N
a
tag: t
c
o
_
B
NOTE : This is an EWIS (Electrical Wiring Interconnection System) task. EWIS is defined in o
x
1
ESPM 20-33-11. V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
. B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Example: _
D
o
c
_
C
TASK 05-21-30-200-001-A o
p
y
GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF FORWARD CARGO COMPARTMENT (AS FAR AS VISIBLE, r
i
IF ACT(S) INSTALLED) (EWIS) g

h
t
_
F
o
t
e
Refer to the MPD TASK: ZL-131-01 r
GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF FORWARD CARGO V

_
N
GENERAL VISUAL INSPECTION OF FORWARD CARGO a

t
c
NOTE: This is a EWIS (Electrical Wiring Interconnection System) procedure. EWIS is defined in o
_
B
ESPM 20-33-11. o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
11.7 MPD Task Applicability D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
In the MPD document, each MPD task has a defined applicability in the column “APPLICABILITY”. i
g
h
t
_
F
Only the MPD defines the applicability of a scheduled maintenance task. Therefore if criteria o
o
(modification or Service Bulletins (SBs)) are used to manage the configuration of the task, only the t
e
r
modification and Service Bulletin (SB) defined by the MPD applicability can be used. V
_
N
a
t
RULE: c
o
_
B
o
● Case 1: If the applicability of the MPD task is only expressed with MODs and/or SBs or with x
1
the name of a system/equipment, the effectivity of the Maintenance task must be managed V
_
using the related modifications and SBs. N

a
t
c
o
●
_
Case 2: If the applicability of the MPD task is expressed with weight variants, A/C models, A/C B
o
x
Groups or any other criterion that is neither a MOD nor an SB nor a system/equipment, the 1
a
effectivity of the related maintenance task must be “ALL” and the following Note must be added V
_
in the reason for the job after the MPD reference: N
a
t
c
o
NOTE: The effectivity of this task is given in the MPD. _

B
o
x
2
Use this Typical Sentence for the content of the Note: V

_
N
a
t
o For A320 Family: T139 c
o
_
B
o
o For A330/A340 Family: T210 x

2
a
V
_
o For A380 program: GEN147. N
a
t
●
c
Any combination of case 1 and case 2: the effectivity of the related maintenance task must be o
_
“ALL” and the following Note must be added in the reason for the job after the MPD reference:
B
o
x
“NOTE: The effectivity of this task is given in the MPD.” 2

b
V
_
N
a
t
c
For specific rules for structural scheduled maintenance tasks, refer to UG2100280.9 AMM Structural o
_
Scheduled Maintenance Tasks. B

o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
11.8 Rule for MPD tasks with a scheduled replacement D
o
c
_
RULE: C
o
p
For scheduled replacement task from MPD, use the function code 920 y
r
i
g
h
EXAMPLE: t
_
F
o
o
t
e
TASK 26-21-41-920-801-A r
V
Scheduled Replacement of the Cartridge _
N
a
c
MPD 262100-00003 o
_
B
DISCARD CARTRIDGE OF ENGINE FIRE EXTINGUISHING BOTTLE o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
11.9 Rule for MPD tasks associated to the ALS Part 2 document (ALI D
o
c
beyond Maintenance PPT) _
C
o
p
y
r
i
Airworthiness Authorities request to prepare potential future extension of Maintenance Program g
h
t
Publication Trigger (MPPT). MPPT means limit of application of the Maintenance Program below limits _
F
of validity. ALI tasks beyond (or above) MPPT are in the Section 4 of ALS Part 2 “Damage Tolerant- o
o
t
Airworthiness Limitations Items”. e

r
These tasks are not applicable in the frame of the maintenance program. ALI tasks beyond MPPT not V
_
N
included in the MPD document. a
t
AMM tasks related to ALI beyond MPPT have to be published at the same time as the ALS2. But as c
o
_
there is no MPD reference, the ALI reference is put in the reason for the job in free text as shown B
o
x
below. 1
V
_
N
a
t
c
EXAMPLE: o
_
B
o
x
1
1.Reason for the job a
V
_
N
Refer to the ALI TASK: 532002-01 a

t
c
SPECIAL DETAILED INSPECTION (HFEC & US) OF FRAMES AND FRAME COUPLINGS AT o
_
B
CARGO FLOOR ATTACHMENT FITTINGS FROM FR 23 TO FR 25 AT STR 40 - STR 41 (LH). o
x
2
Extract from section 4 of ALS PART 2. _

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
12 Rules for Cabin ATA Chapter Tasks

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
For cabin ATA chapters, specific rules must be applied if the equipment is a Buyer Furnished p
y
Equipment (BFE) or Seller Supplied BFE (SSBFE). r

i
g
h
t
_
RULES: F
o
o
t
e
● Whatever the task type, insert all relevant FINs in the task title. r
V
_
N
● The CMMv must not be referenced in the AMM. The CMMv is referred in the IPC via the a
t
c
part number. o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
13 Cargo Loading System (CLS) content definition

_
D
o
c
_
Introduction C
o
p
This paragraph is intended for the writers of the Cargo Loading System (CLS) tasks and details its y
r
i
presentation. g
h
Purpose of the CLS tasks is to provide cargo handling personnel with the instructions on how to load t
_
F
or unload Unit Load Devices (ULDs). o

o
t
The CLS tasks must detail both, manual and semi-automatic loading/unloading. e
r
V
_
The CLS is described in the AMM as part of the cargo loading description. N
a
t
c
o
_
Special CLS requirements in the AMM B
o
x
The loading tasks and the description of the CLS components are described in: 1
● ATA 25-51 for A330/A340 and A321/A320/A319/A318.

V
_
N
● ATA 50-23 for A380

a
t
c
o
_
B
The CLS describes the functions and how to operate each component under normal conditions and o
x
1
if the system or the electrical power fails. a
V
_
N
NOTE: a
t
c
The CLS tasks tell the cargo loading personnel how to do the specified task. It is not a task for the o
_
B
maintenance of the aircraft. o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Illustration: _
D
o
c
_
C
Prepare one illustration for each different guide or latch. When operated in exactly the same way, o
p
y
show them on one illustration. Prepare illustrations in such a way that not much or no text is r
i
required. g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Procedure _
D
o
c
_
C
For the loading tasks use the function code 913. o
p
y
r
i
Incorporate a Note in the beginning of the task that says that all CLS users must be familiar with its g
h
t
content before doing the loading/unloading operations. _

F
o
o
t
e
EXAMPLE: r
V
_
N
TASK 50-23-00-913-821-A a
t
c
Operation of the Manually Operated Components of the Cargo Loading System (CLS) of the Lower o
_
B
Deck Forward and Aft Cargo Compartments o
x
1
NOTE: This procedure tells the cargo loading personnel how to do the specified task. _
N
a
t
c
o
It is not a procedure for the maintenance of the aircraft. _
B
o
1. Reason for the Job x
1
Self explanatory a
… _
N
a
4. Procedure t
c
o
(Ref. Fig. Manually Operated Components of the Lower Deck Cargo-Compartment SHEET 1) _
B
Subtask 50-23-00-980-012-A o
x
2
A. Operation of the Manually-Operated CLS Components. V

_
(1) Make sure that you know how to operate these components correctly before you N
a
t
start the load/unload procedure. c
o
(2) The illustrations that follow show you how to operate the manually- _
B
o
operated CLS components of the lower deck forward and aft cargo compartments. x
2
a
(3) Make sure that you know how to operate these components correctly before V
_
you start the load/unload procedure. N
a
t
c
o
Describe a separate Loading/unloading task for each cargo compartment and pallet/ULD (see the _
B
o
figure below) x
2
b
Content of the Loading Tasks: _

N
a
t
c
o
Give instructions on how to load/unload ULDs/pallets to/from the cargo compartments. An illustration _
B
o
must show only one configuration, as given by a combination of modifications. x
3
V
_
Prepare separate illustrations for each configuration. Include WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and/or Notes N
a
t
applicable to the operations c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
The loading / unloading description consists of an illustration showing the positions of all manually c
_
C
operated components and automatic components that must be manually operated because of system o
p
y
failure. It also shows the position in relation to the Unit Load Devices (ULD) to be loaded. r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Show the information of all configurations in form of floor plans for each cargo compartment. Each _
D
o
floor plan must have a supporting text page(s). c

_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A short text in relation to the illustration can be added to describe the loading sequence and actions _
D
o
to complete the loading. This also includes the pre-setting of latches and guides and any special c
_
C
information that is necessary. o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
14 Directives Specific to Cabin and Cargo Access Panels

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
14.1 General y
r
i
g
This paragraph is intended for the writers dealing with AMM maintenance tasks which include cargo h
t
_
and cabin access panels. F

o
o
t
e
r
In order to avoid inconsistencies of panel information between AMM Chapter 06, IPC, and AMM tasks, V
the rules described here below must be applied. _

N
a
t
c
o
_
14.2 Rules B
o
x
1
For access panel removal & installation tasks, no configuration must be applied in the AMM task. Use V
_
generic step with typical layout N

a
t
c
o
_
For component removal & installation tasks or zonal inspection tasks, no configuration must be applied B
o
x
in the AMM task. Use generic step with typical layout. 1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
14.2.1 Rule for Steps D
o
c
_
The steps to remove / install cabin/cargo access panel(s) must not be customized. C
o
p
The generic step must indicate where the panels are located (either by giving the frames or by y
r
specifying the components to which the panels give access to) and provide a link to the i
g
h
removal/installation tasks of these access panels. t

_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
Example 1: _
B
o
x
Remove the applicable sidewall panels between FR35 and FR35.5 2
Ref. AMM TASK 25-54-12-000-003. _

N
a
t
Example 2: c
o
_
B
(2) Remove the applicable ceiling panels to get access to the upper o
x
2
attachments of the stowage Ref. AMM TASK 25-23-41-000-001. a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
14.2.2 Rules for the Illustration D
o
c
_
The AMM figure located in cabin/cargo installation/removal tasks must not be customized C
o
p
The AMM figure located in cabin/cargo installation/removal tasks must have a general layout. y
r
The AMM figure content and title must show “Typical example, refer to AMM 06 for the panel details”.
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
15 Page Block 201 Maintenance Practices

_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
15.1 General h
t
_
F
"Maintenance Practices" are a combination of Servicing, Removal/Installation, Adjustment/Test, o

o
t
Inspection/Check, Cleaning/Painting, Approved Repairs, and, where appropriate, special tasks. When e
r
the required maintenance task is not lengthy and is relatively simple, a combination of the above may V
_
N
be grouped under one heading and called Maintenance Practices. a
t
The Page Blocks 201 can be used for tasks which provide general Maintenance Practices such as: c
o
_
B
o
●
x
Aircraft jacking, 1
● Aircraft levelling, V
_
N
● Application of electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic power, a

t
c
● Opening/closing of engine cowling, MLG doors o
_
●
B
Installation of complex safety devices, o
x
● Data loading tasks (**ON A380 ONLY) (Refer to Paragraph 5.5.3 Case of the data 1
a
loading tasks (P.Block 03). V

_
N
a
t
c
NOTE: o
_
B
The Page Blocks 201 includes Tasks that are frequently referring to in other maintenance tasks; they o
x
are known as repetitive tasks. 2
V
_
N
a
t
15.2 Text c
o
_
B
o
General policy applicable to MP also applies to these Page Blocks. x
2
a
V
_
15.3 Illustrations N
a
t
c
o
General policy applicable to MP also applies to these Page Blocks. _
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
15.4 Layout D
o
c
_
General policy applicable to MP also applies to these Page Blocks. C
o
p
y
r
i
g
15.4.1 Title of the Page Block and Tasks h
t
_
F
The title of the Page Block must be specific according to the reason of the General Maintenance o
o
t
Practices. e
r
V
_
EXAMPLE: N
a
t
45-10-00 PB 201 - CENTRAL MAINTENANCE SYSTEM (CMS) – MAINTENANCE PRACTICES c

o
_
B
o
x
The title of the task may include such keywords as pressurizing, jacking, energizing, opening, 1
closing, reset, uploading directly associated with a specific maintenance function. These titles are V
_
N
associated to the following function codes that can be found in maintenance practices Page Blocks: a
t
c
o
_
B
010, 081, 091, 410, 480, 481, 491, 550 series, 580 series, 616 (**ON A380 ONLY), 860 series, 910 o
x
series. 1
a
V
_
N
a
15.4.2 Ground Support Equipment Specification t

c
o
_
B
Include brief specification of common ground support equipment used to accomplish or to be used for o
x
the concerned maintenance practice (such as hydraulic jacks for aircraft jacking, air ground power 2
unit for hydraulic tanks air pressurization). _

N
a
t
c
NOTE: o
_
B
In this kind of specification, the values are not considered as numerical data by the system and the o
x
conversion is not calculated automatically. The author must indicate the values and their conversion. 2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
EXAMPLE: o
_
Subtask 07-11-00-480-002- B
o
x
E. General Information for Jacking 2

b
(1) ....... V
_
N
(2) Specifications of the jacks: a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
CAPACITY (MIN.) CLOSED HEIGHT EXTENDED HEIGHT N

a
t
(MAX.) (MAX.) c
o
_
B
NOSE JACK 51000 daN 2100 mm 4500 mm o

x
3
(114652.6 lbf) (82.7 in.) (177.2 in.) a
WING JACKS 190000 daN 4300 mm 7000 mm _

N
a
(4271370 lbf) (169.3 in.) (275.6 in.) t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
15.4.3 Reason for the job V

_
N
a
Refer to Para. Reason for the job (Para.1) t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Use this heading to briefly describe the purpose of the standard maintenance practice covered in the _
D
o
Page Block. c
_
C
o
p
y
For general standard practices (such as electrical power supply, air supply, hydraulic), which comprise r
i
several method configurations tasks (such as by APU, GPU, engine), the "Reason for the Job" g
h
t
paragraphs must include a Note highlighting the existence of alternative methods as follows: _
F
o
o
t
e
EXAMPLE: r
TASK 21-00-00-618-801-A V
_
N
Pre-Conditioning through the Low-Pressure Ground Connection a

t
c
o
_
B
1. Reason for the Job effectivity o
x
NOTE: There are alternative methods for the pre-conditioning. This task gives one of the methods. 1
For the other methods refer to the relevant tasks in this page block. _
N
a
. t
c
o
_
B
o
x
15.4.4 Job Set-Up Information 1
a
Refer to Para. Job Set-Up Information (Para.2) (Automatic data entry) _

N
a
The following paragraphs extracted from the text coding can be found in the Job Set-Up Information t
c
o
of a Page Block 201: _
B
● Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment o

x
2
● Work Zones and Access Panels V
● Expendable Parts
_
N
a
● Referenced Information
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
15.4.5 Job Set-up 2

a
V
_
Refer to Para. Job Set-Up (Para.3) N
a
t
c
o
_
B
15.4.6 Procedure o
x
2
b
Refer to Para. Procedure (Para.4) V
_
N
a
t
Tasks must be self-contained and be organized in logical sequential steps and broken down into c
o
subtasks. _
B
o
x
3
If it is necessary to remove another component for access within the task either: V
_
● Where possible, refer to the appropriate task

N
a
t
Or c
o
_
● Specify the required removal steps including WARNINGS/CAUTIONS related to B
o
x
specific steps of task. 3
a
V
_
N
a
t
NOTE: c
o
_
In any case the Function Code 010 must be used for access. B
o
x
3
b
V
_
EXAMPLE: N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
4. Procedure _
D
o
Subtask 12-31-24-660-051 c
_
C
Battery Cold Weather Maintenance Practices o
p
y
The batteries can stay on the aircraft during the cold soak if : r
i
.......... g
h
t
You must remove the batteries (2PB1, 2PB2 and 2PB3) if the OAT is lower than -30 deg.C (-22.00 _
F
o
deg.F) during the cold soak (Ref. AMM TASK 24-38-51-000-801) (Ref. AMM TASK 24-38-52-000- o
t
e
801) . r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
15.4.7 Close-up B
o
x
1
Refer to Para. Close-Up (Para.5) V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
16 Page Block 301 Servicing

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
16.1 General y
r
i
g
Servicing tasks must include those tasks that are normally required as a result of other maintenance h
t
_
actions. These servicing tasks must be self-contained and can be either routine or restorative in F
o
o
nature. It includes items such as fluid quantity and pressure checks, fluid and gas replenishment, tire t
e
r
inflation, lubrication of control cables, sterilization of potable water systems. V
_
N
a
Servicing aspects of filters and magnetic plugs, replacement of filaments and fluorescent tubes are t
c
o
also covered in their specific chapters. _
B
o
x
1
For the SA/LR, tasks covering replenishment (such as hydraulic fluid, fuel) are listed in chapter 12- V
_
13-XX. The last two digits indicate the ATA reference at subject system. N
a
t
c
o
_
NOTE: B
o
Even if a task required by the MPD is self-explanatory, minor or off A/C, such a task must be covered x
1
a
in the AMM (Ref. Para.9. Maintenance Procedures related to MPD Requirements). V

_
N
a
t
c
16.2 Text and Illustrations o

_
B
o

2
V
_
N
a
16.3 Layout t
c
o
_
B
General policy applicable to MP also applies to this section. o
x
2
a
16.3.1 Title of the Page Block and Tasks _

N
a
t
c
Title of the Page Block: Refer to PRD0002.0 AMM and AM Product Definition o
_
B
o
x
EXAMPLE: 12-11-28 PB 301 - FUEL SYSTEM - SERVICING 2

b
Title of a task: The title may be allocated by the system but can be changed by the author if necessary. V
_
N
It includes the FIN(s) in brackets for the SA/LR (they are separated from the title for the A380). The a
t
c
title may include such keywords as replenishment, lubricating, refuel, defuel directly associated with o
_
a specific maintenance function. These titles are associated to the following function codes: 600 series B
o
x
3
V
EXAMPLE: _
N
a
t
c
TASK 12-12-32-611-801 o
_
B
Hydraulic Replenishment of the MLG Shock Absorber (Aircraft on Jacks) o
x
3
TASK 23-28-00-610-801 a
V
Uploading of the SATCOM Software _
N
TASK 28-25-00-650-801 a
t
c
Pressure Defuel Procedure o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
16.3.2 Breakdown of Servicing Task D
o
c
_
Refer to PRD0002.0 AMM and AM Product Definition. C
o
p
Refer to UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM y
r
(AMTOSS). i
g
h
t
_
F
General Servicing Warnings/Cautions o
o
t
e
r
Includes general WARNINGS/CAUTIONS applicable to the concerned servicing task. V

_
Refer to Warnings/Cautions. N
a
t
c
o
_
EXAMPLE: B
o
x
1
24-21-00 PB 301 CONF 00 - AC VARIABLE FREQUENCY GENERATION ((VFG)) - SERVICING V

_
N
TASK 24-21-00-680-801-A a
t
c
Draining of the Oil from the VFG o
_
FIN : 4000xt1, 4000xt2, 4000xt3, 4000XT4 B

o
x
WARNING: YOU MUST BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU DO WORK ON THE ENGINE PARTS AFTER 1
a
THE ENGINE IS SHUTDOWN. THE ENGINE PARTS CAN STAY HOT FOR ALMOST 1 HOUR. V
_
N
CAUTION: DO NOT DO THE SERVICING OF A DISCONNECTED VFG. CONTINUED a
t
OPERATION OF A DEFECTIVE VFG CAN CAUSE DAMAGE. c

o
_
Reason for the Job B

o
x
Refer to paragraph Reason for the job. 2
V
_
N
Job Set-up Information a

t
c
Refer to Paragraph Job Set-Up Information (Automatic data entry) o

_
B
o
x
2
Job Set-up a
Refer to Paragraph Job Set-Up. V

_
N
a
t
c
Procedure o
_
B
Refer to Paragraph Procedure. o
x
Tasks are to be given in logical sequential steps and broken down into Subtasks (Refer to 2
b
UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM (AMTOSS)). V

_
N
If it is necessary to remove another component for access either refer to the appropriate removal task a
t
c
or specify the required removal steps (Refer Para. Procedure) o
_
Includes WARNINGS/CAUTIONS related to specific steps of task. B

o
x
Test 3
V
_
N
a
After restorative servicing task it could be necessary to make a simple test. The test that is specifically t
c
required to be carried out following servicing must be sufficient to ensure that the basic function of the o
_
B
system/component is correct. Splitting of the test into subtasks must be limited to Functions Codes o
x
3
860 to 869. a
V
_
N
Tasks have to be broken down into Subtasks. a

t
c
Refer to UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM o

_
B
(AMTOSS). o
x
3
Data Loading (**ON A380 ONLY) b
Refer to Paragraph 5.5.3 Case of the data loading task (P. Block 03) (**ON A380 ONLY) V
_
N
a
t
c
Close-up o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Refer to Paragraph Close-Up. _

D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
17 Page Block 401 Removal / Installation

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
17.1 General y
r
i
g
Removal tasks must be used to describe the removal of a component, assembly, subassembly, unit, h
t
_
combination of parts and interrelated part(s) from the aircraft. F

o
o
t
e
r
The tasks must clearly describe the step-by-step operation in a logical workflow sequence as V
necessary to gain access to and subsequently remove the desired hardware. _

N
a
t
c
o
A list of required materials, tools, fixtures, or test and/or support equipment must be listed in tabular _
B
o
format at the beginning of the task. x
1
V
_
Any prerequisite operations, inclusive of panel or plate openings, that must be performed prior to the N
a
t
use of a particular removal or deactivation task, will be appropriately referenced. Plate and/or panel c
o
_
opening instructions must reference each plate and/or panel number. B
o
x
1
a
All measurements and/or values that have to be documented prior to an individual maintenance action V
_
being performed must be listed at the beginning of the applicable step. N
a
t
c
o
Installation tasks must be used to describe the installation of a component, assembly, subassembly, _
B
o
unit, combination of parts and interrelated part(s) onto the aircraft, and if applicable, any removal x
2
prerequisite operations that must be rectified such as closing of panels. V

_
N
a
t
The tasks must clearly describe the step-by-step operations in a logical workflow sequence as c
o
_
necessary to install the basic, and if applicable, access hardware. B

o
x
2
a
Removal/Installation tasks are provided to: V

_
● Include the subjects required by the Maintenance Planning Document (MPD), the
N
a
t
c
Master Minimum Equipment List (MMEL) and the Configuration Deviation List (CDL). o
_
● Account for those subjects indicated in the TSM as a cause of failure and requiring B
o
x
specific Removal/Installation instructions. 2

b
● Include all those subjects where precise data is required to permit the operator to V
_
N
perform all the Removal and Installation functions satisfactorily. a
t
c
o
_
Precise data includes electrical power ON/OFF, access, torque, loading, post-installation testing also B
o
x
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS that may be required to account for safety of personnel and/or damage 3
V
to equipment. _
N
a
t
c
Sufficient illustrations must be provided to enable the operator to identify all the items mentioned in o
_
B
the TASK. The illustration must also include a location diagram (phantom view) indicating precise o
x
3
location, and where necessary, orthographic details to precisely indicate dimensions required for a
adjustments or clearances. V
_
N
a
t
c
If required, for Removal/Installation of a computer, add a step printout of the TROUBLE SHOOTING o
_
B
DATA via CMS (**ON LR AND A380 ONLY) and Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS) (**ON SA o
x
ONLY) before the computer is removed. 3

b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
LMP Definition: _
D
o
c
_
C
A "Line Maintenance Part" (LMP) is defined as any item that can be readily replaced on aircraft during o
p
y
line maintenance without special tool*s and without necessarily requiring bench tests or re-certification r
i
tasks after replacement. g

h
t
_
F
o
Line Maintenance covers routine checks, inspections and malfunction corrections as well as all other o
t
e
maintenance activities encountered at line stations and at base stations during transit, turnaround and r
overnight stop of the aircraft. V

_
N
a
t
c
Line Maintenance does not cover any heavy-maintenance activities requiring extended stays of the o
_
B
aircraft in hangar or service areas. o
x
1
*Special tools: tools not covered by the TEM (Tool & Equipment Manual) or not considered as _
N
a
standard (e.g.: screwdriver) t
c
o
_
B
Exception: The removal and installation task for the LMP is described in the AMM (Aircraft o
x
1
Maintenance Manual) Task or in ESPM (Electrical Standard Procedure Manual) for electrical standard a
V
item (such as connectors, relays, terminal blocks): _
N
a
t
c
● The removal of the LMP must not entail any bench tests. o
_
B
● The installation of the LMP must not entail re-certification tasks. o

x
2
● Bonded, riveted, welded or soldered parts are not normally considered to be LMPs. V
●
_
Attaching parts required for removal/installation of a part/assembly will only then be N
a
defined as LMPs, when that part/assembly is also defined as an LMP/LRU t

c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
17.2 Text D
o
c
_
Removal and Installation tasks may cover: C
o
p
y
r
● A single component where the tasks deal with the TASK of the removal and the i
g
h
installation of that single component. t

_
F
● A single component where the tasks deal with multiple TASKS of removal and o
o
t
installation of individual parts of that component. e
r
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
Motorized valve will have one task for the motorized valve and another task for the motor. o
_
B
o
x
1
● Two identical components (Left and right), or several identical components located in V
_
various ATA sections. The first component in ATA No. must be allocated the N
a
t
removal/installation task, with the Functional Item Nos. (FIN) of the remaining c
o
_
components indicated, immediately following the title. The component ATA No. will be B
o
cross-referenced in the Component Location paragraph of the appropriate Description x

1
a
and Operation Page Blocks. V

_
N
a
t
c
● Several typical components e.g. fluorescent tubes. In this instance, the first component o
_
B
dealt with can be at chapter, section or subject level, depending on which section or o
x
sections are involved. The component ATA No. will be cross-referenced in the 2
Component Location paragraph of the appropriate Description and Operation Page _

N
a
Blocks. t
c
o
_
B
o
x
17.3 Illustrations 2
a
General policy applicable to MP also applies to these Page Blocks. _

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
17.4 Different Types of Page Blocks 401 V

_
N
a
General policy applicable to MP also applies to this section. t
c
o
_
B
o
x
17.4.1 Page Block Covering a Single Component 3
V
_
Breakdown of Removal task N

a
t
Task (Refer to UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM c
o
_
(AMTOSS)) B
o
x
3
a
17.4.1.1 TASK Title V

_
N
a
t
The title may be allocated by the system but can be changed by the author if necessary. It includes c
o
the FIN(s). It must include the word Removal associated to the code 000. _
B
o
x
3
b
EXAMPLE: V
_
21-26-15 PB 401 CONF 00 - DETECTOR - COOLING EFFECT, AVIONICS VENTILATION - N
a
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
TASK 21-26-15-000-801-A _
D
o
Removal of the Avionics-Ventilation Cooling-Effect Detector c

_
C
FIN: 5HQ1 , 5HQ2 o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
17.4.1.2 WARNINGS/CAUTIONS F
o
o
t
e
Refer to Warnings/Cautions. r
V
_
N
Includes those WARNINGS/CAUTIONS that are related to removal tasks as a whole a

t
c
o
_
B
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT NO AIR IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM o
x
FROM THE MAIN ENGINE, THE APU OR FROM A GROUND SOURCE. 1
HOT COMPRESSED AIR CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONNEL. _

N
a
t
c
o
CAUTION: BE VERY CAREFUL WHEN YOU DO WORK ON OR NEAR THE AIR-CONDITIONING _
B
DUCTS. THE DUCTS ARE MADE OF THIN MATERIAL AND YOU CAN EASILY BREAK THEM. o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
17.4.2 Reason for the Job D
o
c
_
Refer to Para. Reason for the job (Para.1) C
o
p
y
r
i
g
17.4.2.1 Job Set-up Information h
t
_
F
Refer to Para. 2. B. Job Set-Up Information (Para.2) (Automatic data entry) o
o
t
e
r
The following paragraphs extracted from the text coding can be found in the Job Set-Up Information V
_
of a Removal Task: N
a
t
c
o
●
_
Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment: Refer to Para. Fixtures, Tools, Test and B
o
Support Equipment x
1
● Consumable Materials. Refer to Para. Consumable Materials V

_
N
● Work Zones and Access Panels. Refer to Para. Work Zones and Access Panels a
t
●
c
Expendable Parts: Refer to Para. Expendable Parts o
_
● Referenced Information: Refer to Para. Referenced Information B

o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
17.4.2.2 Job Set-up t
c
o
_
Refer to Para. Job Set-Up (Para.3) B

o
x
2
V
_
17.4.2.3 Procedure N
a
t
c
Tasks are to be given in logical sequential steps and broken down into Subtasks (Ref. TASK o
_
B
SUBTASK NUMBERING SYSTEM). o
x
2
Refer to Para. Procedure (Para.4) a
If it is necessary to remove another component for access either where possible V

_
N
a
t
●
c
Refer to the appropriate Removal task o
_
B
Or o
x
● Specify the required removal steps 2

b
V
_
N
WARNINGS/CAUTIONS related to specific steps of task must be included. a
t
c
o
_
Use of complex special tools (not simple hand tools) must be specified in text and illustrations. B
o
x
3
V
Use of rigging pins with their precise location must be illustrated. _
N
a
t
c
For standard practices, refer if available to tasks in ATA Chapter 20 or 70 (Function Codes 910 to o
_
B
918). If not available, the working steps have to be created at subtask level with Function Code 910 o
x
3
series. a
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
_
B
FROM THE MAIN ENGINE, THE APU OR FROM A GROUND SOURCE. o
x
3
HOT COMPRESSED AIR CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONNEL. b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
17.4.2.4 Close-up _
D
o
c
_
Because the Installation task normally follows the removal task, the Close-up task is considered to be C
o
not applicable, but it must be part of the Installation task. p

y
r
i
g
h
NOTE: t
_
F
Where there is a time separation between Removal and Installation tasks, it is anticipated that the o
o
operator will use his common sense on what close-up tasks have to be adopted. t
e
r
V
_
N
17.4.3 Breakdown of Installation Task a

t
c
o
_
TASK (Refer to UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM B
o
(AMTOSS)) x
1
V
_
N
a
17.4.3.1 TASK Title t

c
o
_
The title may be allocated by the system but can be changed by the author if necessary. It includes B
o
x
the FIN(s). The Installation task title must always start with the word Installation associated with the 1
a
code 400. V
_
N
a
t
EXAMPLE: c
o
_
TASK 21-26-15-400-801-A B
o
x
Installation of the Avionics-Ventilation Cooling-Effect Detector 2
V
FIN : 5HQ1 , 5HQ2 _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
17.4.3.2 WARNINGS/CAUTIONS x
2
a
Refer to Warnings/Cautions. V
_
N
a
t
c
Includes those WARNINGS/CAUTIONS that are related to installation tasks as a whole. They can be o
_
B
identical to those of the removal task. o
x
2
b
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
a
t
c
_
FROM THE MAIN ENGINE, THE APU OR FROM A GROUND SOURCE. B

o
x
HOT COMPRESSED AIR CAN CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONNEL. 3
V
CAUTION : YOU MUST NOT LET ENGINE OIL FALL ON THE ENGINE. REMOVE UNWANTED _
N
a
OIL IMMEDIATELY WITH A CLEAN LINT-FREE CLOTH. THE OIL CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE t
c
SURFACE PROTECTION AND TO SOME ENGINE PARTS o

_
B
o
x
3
a
17.4.3.3 Reason for the Job V

_
N
a
t
c
Refer to Para. Reason for the job (Para.1) o

_
B
o
x
3
b
17.4.3.4 Job Set-up Information V
_
N
a
t
c
Refer to Para. Job Set-Up Information (Para.2) (Automatic data entry) o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
The following paragraphs extracted from the text coding can be found in the Job Set-Up Information _
D
o
of an Installation task: c
_
C
● Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment: Refer to Para. Fixtures, Tools, Test and o
p
y
Support Equipment r
i
● Consumable Materials. Refer to Para. Consumable Materials g

h
t
● Work Zones and Access Panels. Refer to Para. Work Zones and Access Panels _
F
o
● Expendable Parts: Refer to Para. Expendable Parts o
t
● Referenced Information: Refer to Para. Referenced Information

e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
17.4.3.5 Job Set-up _

B
o
x
Refer to Para. Job Set-Up (Para.3) 1
V
_
N
a
t
17.4.3.6 Procedure c
o
_
B
o
x
1
17.4.3.6.1 Preparation of a Replacement a
V
Component _
N
a
t
The replacement component is assumed to be unpacked, in correct condition and serviceable, c
o
_
therefore does not include this data. Functions that may be involved with the component are B
o
installation of parts removed from the existing unserviceable component, flushing, draining, topping- x
2
up, lubricating, adjusting that may be required before installation. V

_
N
a
t
c
The Function Code 560 must be used for the appropriate subtask.There must be no further breakdown o
_
of subtask function even if other functions are involved. B

o
x
2
a
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
TASK 55-43-19-560-002 a
t
Preparation of the Rudder Fillet Fairing for Installation c

o
_
… B
o
x
4. Procedure 2
b
Subtask 55-43-19-420-050 V
_
A. Prepare the Rudder Filet Fairing for Installation N

a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
17.4.3.6.2 Preparation for Installation _

D
o
c
Clean the component/structure interface and check for freedom from damage. _
C
o
p
y
r
When the preparation work is just a general advice as defined by the Typical Sentence, this step must i
g
h
appear in the procedure Subtask. t
_
F
o
o
In case of specific cleaning task involving specific task and materials one Subtask with the appropriate t
e
r
Function Code e.g. 160 must be created. V
_
N
a
The same rule must be applied for specific check task involving e.g. precise measurement. t
c
o
_
B
o
Installation tasks are to be given in logical sequential steps, to be broken down into subtasks and to x
1
include, where required: V

_
N
a
t
● Lubrication points. c
o
_
B
o
●
x
Use new seals, new cotter pins (Expendable parts called for in "Job Set-up 1
a
information"). V
_
N
a
t
● Application points of sealants, jointing compounds c
o
_
B
o
● Refer to standard practice tasks (Function Codes 910 to 918) in ATA chapter 20 or 70 x
2
for tasks if available. V

_
N
a
t
●
c
If not practicable the working steps have to be created. o
_
B
o
x
● Method of securing component. 2

a
V
_
●
N
Special torque loading of screwed parts to be between imperial limits with metric a
t
equivalents or vice-versa according to the information source. Torque values without a c

o
_
tolerance must be limited to exceptional cases. B

o
x
2
b
● Simple test e.g. freedom of movement that can be accomplished during installation. V
_
N
a
t
● Use of complex special tools (not simple hand tools) to be specified in text and c
o
_
illustrations. B
o
x
3
● Use of rigging pins with their precise location must be illustrated. V

_
N
● Precise points for dimensional checks to be illustrated. Method of adjustment to a

t
c
achieve dimensions to be specified and adjusting points to be indicated by an arrow o
_
B
and suitable annotations e.g. gap X, on the illustration. Precise dimensions for gap X o
x
in text. 3
a
V
_
N
● Before an electrical connector is connected use the Typical Sentence TS34: "Make a
t
c
sure that the electrical connectors are clean and in the correct condition". o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
TASK 21-23-51-400-801-A o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Installation of the Extraction Fan _

D
o
............... c
_
C
4. Procedure o
p
y
(Ref. Fig. Extraction Fan 300HU1, 300HU2 SHEET 1) r
i
Subtask 21-23-51-210-001-A g
h
t
A. Preparation for Installation _

F
o
(1) Clean the component interface and/or the adjacent area. o
t
e
(2) Make sure that the parts retained from the removed component are clean and in the correct r
condition. V
_
N
(3) Make sure that the sleeves (2) and (13) are in the correct condition. a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
17.4.3.6.3 Preparation for Test (As V

_
applicable) N
a
t
c
o
_
B
● Make sure that the work area and travel ranges are clear. o
x
●
1
Reinstate power supply for the component to be tested (Subtasks with Function Code a
V
861, 863 or 860 with cross-reference to the corresponding task). _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
NOTE: o
x
2
Tasks have to be broken down into Subtasks. V
_
N
a
● (Refer to UG2100280.4 – AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT t

c
o
SYSTEM (AMTOSS)). _
B
●
o
Number of Subtasks must be limited to the essential maintenance functions e.g. x
2
system configuration. a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
17.4.3.6.4 Test: B
o
x
2
The test must be indicated either: b
V
_
N
● Where possible by a Subtask referring to a test task a

t
c
● Or by specific required test steps which must be integrated in the installation task. o
_
B
o
x
3
Splitting in subtasks must be limited to Function Codes 860 to 869. V
In any case the test that is specifically required to be carried out following installation must be sufficient _
N
a
to ensure that all reconnections have been made satisfactorily and that the basic function of the t
c
o
component is correct and in accordance with the appropriate part of the Adjustment/Test Procedure _
B
o
(Refer to Page Block 501 ADJUSTMENT/TEST). x
3
a
If it is necessary to observe specific operations of the component under test when fairings and panels _
N
a
are not fitted, then the text reference must be followed with the exact observations that are required. t
c
o
The fairings and/or panels are then fitted on satisfactory completion of the test, and the test repeated _
B
to ensure that the work that has been carried out since the previous test will not cause obstruction. o
x
3
This re-test is based on Design Office requirement and only necessary only for sensitive areas such b
V
as flight controls, landing gear. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
If during a removal/installation task, a fuel or hydraulic line, or air duct was disconnected, do a leak _
D
o
test as required. c
_
C
o
p
y
r
17.4.3.7 Close-up i
g
h
t
Refer to Para. Close-Up (Para.5) _

F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
17.5 Page Block Covering Two or Several Identical Components D
o
c
_
Each component must be fully covered by the appropriate TASKS. The layout must be as follows: C
o
p
y
r
i
g
17.5.1 Title of the Page Block h
t
_
F
Refer to PRD0002 Module 0 o

o
t
e
r
● For SA/LR the different FINs will be listed in the Page Block title (extracted from the V
_
ATA REF data-base) N

a
t
c
o
_
EXAMPLE : 30-72-51 PB 401 - NIPPLE - HEATED ( 26DV , 28DV , 30DV , 31DV , 32DV ) - B
o
x
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION 1
V
_
N
● For A380, the different FINs will be listed in the task title (see example below) a
t
c
o
_
B
o
17.5.2 Task Title x

1
a
All the FINs are listed at task level. V

_
N
a
t
c
EXAMPLE : o
_
B
o
x
TASK 30-73-15-000-801-A 2
Removal of the Sensor-Temperature, forward and aft Section _

N
a
t
c
o
FIN _
B
: 1260DW , 1280DW , 1320DW , 1360DW , 1380DW , 1400DW , 1420DW , 1440DW , 14 o

x
2
60DW , 1480DW , 1500DW , 1520DW , 1540DW , 2200DW , 2220DW , 2240DW , 2260D a
V
W , 2280DW , 2300DW , 2320DW , 2340DW , 2360DW , 2380DW , 2420DW , 4000DW , _
N
a
4020DW , 4260DW , 4420DW t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
17.5.3 Removal TASK 1 V

_
N
a
Removal of first component must be fully covered in this task. t
c
For the contents and layout, refer to Page Block Covering a Single Component. o
_
B
o
x
3
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
a
TASK 29-13-57-000-801-A t
c
o
Removal of the Yellow Engine 3(4) Pump A HP Check-Valve _

B
o
FIN : 5116JM31 , 5116JM32 x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
17.5.4 Removal TASK 2 c

o
_
B
o
Removal of second component covered in the Page Block. x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
The content of the task must not be developed. Reference must be made to the complete removal _
D
o
task. Only subtasks which differ from those developed in the complete removal task must be c
_
C
described. o
p
y
r
i
NOTE: g
h
t
If the operations differ to such an extent as to become confusing for the operator then the _
F
o
Removal/Installation tasks must be covered by individual tasks. o
t
e
r
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
o
_
B
TASK 29-13-57-000-802-A o
x
Removal of the Engine 3(4) Pump A Yellow HP Extractor-Plug 1
FIN : 5516JM307 , 5516JM309 _

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
17.5.5 Removal Task 3 V

_
N
a
Removal of third component covered in the Page Block: refer to Removal task 2 t
c
o
_
B
EXAMPLE: o
x
2
V
_
TASK 29-13-57-000-803-A N
a
t
Removal of the Yellow Engine 3(4) Pump B HP Check-Valve c
o
FIN : 5120JM31 , 5120JM32 _

B
o
x
2
a
17.5.6 Installation Tasks V

_
N
a
t
They must follow the philosophy defined in Removal task 1, Removal task 2 and Removal task 3. c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
17.6 Page Block covering an MPD Replacement Task D
o
c
_
The following policy and layout must be used. C
o
p
y
r
NOTE: i
g
h
Even if a task required by the MPD is self-explanatory, such a task must be covered in the AMM (Refer t
_
F
to Para. MP related to MPD Requirements). o
o
t
e
r
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
a
t
TASK 29-22-00-920-002 c
o
_
Remove Ram Air Turbine AGCM and Pump for Bench Test B
o
x
1

_
N
Refer to the MPD TASK: 292000-06 a
t
…
c
o
_
4. Procedure B
o
x
1
a
Subtask 29-22-00-020-052 V
_
N
A. Removal of the Components a
t
… c
o
_
Subtask 29-22-00-720-055 B
o
x
B. Bench Test 2
…
V
_
N
Subtask 29-22-00-420-053 a
t
c
Scheduled Replacement tasks, Function Code 920 (Refer to UG2100280.4 - AIRCRAFT o

_
B
MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM (AMTOSS)), must be created to cover the o
x
2
MPD TASK. a
V
_
N
RULE: a
t
c
Discard task must be used to describe the removal and the installation of an LRU when required by o
_
B
an MPD discard task. This task must include three specific subtasks: o
x
● Removal Subtask 2
b
● Installation Subtask V
_
N
● Test Subtask (if applicable) a
t
c
If there is already Removal/Installation tasks available and they are in line with the MPD requirements, o
_
it is possible to refer to these tasks in the discard task. B

o
x
3
V
EXAMPLE: Removal/Installation for Scheduled Replacement and reference to different Manuals. _
N
a
t
c
TASK 72-21-00-920-001 o
_
B
Discard Fan Disk and Booster Spool o

x
3
a
V
N
Refer to the MPD TASK: 722100-C1 a

t
c
o
_
B
2. Job Set-up Information o
x
…
3
b
3. Job Set-up V
_
N
Subtask 72-21-00-010-054 a
t
c
A. Remove the engine (Ref. AMM TASK 71-00-00-000-040). o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
4. Procedure c
_
C
Subtask 72-21-00-020-059 o
p
y
A. Remove and discard fan disk and booster spool ESM 72-21-00. r
i
g
h
t
Subtask 72-21-00-420-058 _
F
o
B. Install new fan disc and booster spool ESM 72-21-00. o
t
e
r
5. Close-up V
_
N
Subtask 72-21-00-410-053 a
t
c
A. Install the engine (Ref. AMM TASK 71-00-00-400-040). o
_
B
o
x
1
17.7 Page Block covering a Part-of-Component Replacement V

_
N
a
The removal/installation of part(s) of component must be dealt with in the P. Block covering the t
c
o
concerned component removal/installation. _
B
o
The layout defined below must be followed as close as possible. x
1
a
● Replacement of the complete component(s) _

N
●
a
Refer to Para. A. Page Block Covering a Single Component or B. Page Block Covering t
c
o
Two or Several Identical Components or C. Page Block Covering an MPD _
B
Replacement Task. o
x
2
● Replacement of the part No. 1 following the same layout as for the complete component V
_
replacement. N
a
●
t
Replacement of the part No. 2 (if applicable) following the same layout as for the c
o
complete component replacement. _

B
o
● If it is necessary to remove components for access, only remove what is strictly x

2
a
necessary, and either: V
_
- Make a cross-reference to the applicable removal task (only if it is necessary to do N
a
the full removal task). t

c
o
Or _
B
o
- Include the removal steps in the task (if it is not necessary to do the full task - no x
2
b
cross-reference). V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
17.8 Deactivation / Reactivation Tasks D
o
c
_
These tasks are described at system/sub-system or sub-sub-system level. C
o
p
The Master Minimum Equipment List (MMEL) and the Configuration Deviation List (CDL) show the y
r
AMM Deactivation tasks reference in front of the (m) item. i

g
h
t
_
F
As the aircraft is under dispatch conditions (short turnaround time), the deactivation task must: o
o
• Ensure that MMEL/MCDL requirements are satisfied (NO MORE NO LESS). This means
t
e
r
that the instructions related to the maintenance (m) just after the MMEL condition and to the V
_
paragraph “Purpose of the maintenance task” must be taken into account to author the N
a
t
AMM task. c
o
• Be self-contained (except for standard cross-references, such as energization/de-

_
B
o
energization, pressurization/depressurization). No cross-references for actions directly x

1
related to the deactivation itself. V

_
N
Note: If the MMEL/CDL task calls up a complex task that already exists, contact the Product a
t
c
Leader to know if you can make a cross-reference. o
_
B
o
x
RULE: 1
a
One MMEL/CDL task must be covered by one deactivation task in MP04, and if applicable, by a V
_
N
reactivation task. However, it is not forbidden to use the same AMM deactivation task for more than a
t
one MMEL/CDL task reference. c

o
_
B
o
x
RULE: 2
V
If a task (mainly tests) already exists, it must be duplicated in MP04 with the related MMEL/CDL tag. _
N
a
t
c
RULE: o
_
B
The MMEL/MCDL tasks must have the function code 040 for deactivation and 440 for reactivation, o
x
2
whatever the type of work (such as removal, test, check). a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
RULE: _
B
o
Any AMM change request from Design Office, Suppliers or other external parties must be submitted x
2
b
to STL for validation as soon as an AMM task reference or the technical content deviates from the V
_
intent give in the source document (MMEL Project or CDL Justification dossier). Such modifications N
a
made without coordination with STL can lead to discrepancies with the MMEL/CDL requirements. t
c
o
The reference of the AMM task is contained in the approved MMEL or CDL and must not be modified _
B
o
without agreement from STL. x
3
V
_
General N
a
t
Deactivation and Reactivation must be produced for each MMEL and CDL maintenance item. c
o
_
One MMEL/CDL task must be covered by one AMM deactivation task in page block 04, followed by a B
o
x
reactivation task (if appropriate). 3
a
Explanations on item (m) are given in: V

_
N
a
t
EXAMPLES OF AN MMEL PAGE AND HOW TO USE IT are given for A380. c
o
_
Ensure that ALL Tasks linked with an MMEL/CDL item must have a function code 040 for the B
o
Deactivation. If an associated Reactivation Task is needed the function code must be 440. x
3
b
V
_
EXAMPLE: N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
TASK 21-51-00-040-002 _
D
o
Deactivation of the Air Conditioning Pack c

_
C
............. o
p
y
TASK 21-51-00-440-002 r
i
Reactivation of the Air Conditioning Pack g

h
t
......... _
F
o
o
t
e
If you create the AMM task consider that deactivations are performed under adverse conditions such r
as: time pressure, on outside stations with non-availability of all supporting tools, test equipment, V
_
N
manuals. a
t
c
Following cases of reactivation have to be considered: o
_
B
Failed unit: o
x
● Deal with the replacement of the failed unit followed by the appropriate tests. Cross- 1
reference can be made to the appropriate tasks. _

N
a
● Describe the maintenance operations to be accomplished (part of it will be the reverse t
c
o
of the deactivation task). _
B
Neutralized unit/system, the failure of which is not obvious: o

x
1
● Deal with the restoration to the pre-deactivation conditions followed by trouble shooting a
V
of the system or sub-system or sub-sub-system as per TSM. A cross-reference must _
N
a
only be made to the TSM. t
c
● Describe the maintenance operations to be accomplished (the reverse of the o

_
B
deactivation tasks). o
x
2
● Neutralized unit (possibly removed from the aircraft) for operational safety reasons, V
_
although this is obviously not the faulty item: N
a
● Deal with the restoration to the pre-deactivation conditions. t

c
o
● Describe the maintenance operations to be accomplished (the reverse of the _

B
o
deactivation tasks). x
2
● Install serviceable unit. Cross-reference can be made to the appropriate tasks.

a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
17.8.1 Layout of a Deactivation Task D
o
c
_
C
o
The title of the Page Block 04 will be automatically modified from “Removal/Installation” into
p
y
r
“Deactivation/Reactivation” when the subject of the 6-digit ATA reference is 00. i

g
h
t
_
F
NOTE: o
o
If the 6-digit ATA reference has a subject different from “00”, the Page Block title will remain
t
e
r
“Removal/Installation” (ATA XX-YY-ZZ, with ZZ different from 00). V

_
N
a
t
EXAMPLE: c
o
_
B
o
21-21-00 PB 401 - CABIN AIR DISTRIBUTION AND RECIRCULATION – DEACTIVATION / x

1
REACTIVATION V
_
N
TASK 21-21-00-040-801 a
t
Deactivation of the Lower-Deck Mobile Crew-Rest (LDMCR) Isolation-Valve c

o
_
1. Reason for the Job B

o
x
Refer to the MMEL TASK: 21-21-04-B) Cabin Air Distribution and Recirculation Lower Deck Cabin 1
a
Crew Rest Compartment Ventilation V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
17.8.1.1 Deactivation task number o

x
2
Ensure that ALL tasks linked with MMEL/CDL (m) item must have a function code 040. If an associated V
_
N
Reactivation Task is needed the function code must be 440. a

t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
17.8.1.2 Deactivation Task Title V
_
N
The task title must be in accordance with the MMEL/CDL dispatch requirements. There are 2 cases: a
t
● If it is a real deactivation, then the task title must start with “Deactivation of”.
c
o
_
● If it is a Check, a Test or a Replacement, the task title must not start with “Deactivation B
o
x
of” but with the MMEL requirement. 2

b
● V
_
N
For more information, Ref. Para. 4.1.2 Task Title. a
t
c
o
_
EXAMPLE: B
o
x
3
V
TASK 30-42-00-040-801 _
N
Check of the Heaters and the Failure Warnings of the Fixed and Sliding Windows associated with the a
t
c
operative Window Heat Computer (WHC) (2GD1, 2DG2) o

_
B
o
x
3
Refer to the MMEL TASK: 30-42-01 Windshield Anti-Icing and Defogging Window Heat Computer V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
17.8.1.3 General deactivation WARNINGS/CAUTIONS, x
3
b
Refer to Warnings/Cautions V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
TASK 21-21-00-040-801 o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Deactivation of the Lower-Deck Mobile Crew-Rest (LDMCR) Isolation-Valve _

D
o
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT AIR IS NOT SUPPLIED TO THE AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM c
_
C
FROM THE MAIN ENGINE, THE APU OR A GROUND SOURCE. HOT COMPRESSED AIR CAN o
p
y
CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONNEL. r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
17.8.1.4 Reason for the Job: consists of the MMEL/CDL Task t

e
r
title item V
_
N
The paragraph Reason for the job must refer to the precise MMEL/CDL item number including suffix a
t
c
if needed. o
_
B
o
x
1
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
a
t
1. Reason for the Job c

o
_
Refer to the MMEL TASK: 32-41-02 Main Wheel Tie Bolts B

o
x
Refer to the MMEL TASK: 32-51-03 b) Landing Gear Steering Nose Wheel Steering Electrical 1
a
Deactivation Box (For A/C Towing) V

_
N
a
t
NOTE: c
o
_
The author enters the reference and the description of the task will come up if it exists in MMEL/CDL B
o
x
database. 2
V
_
N
If a task is specific for FAA MMEL, the reason for the job will stipulate. a
t
c
For more information refer to Para. Reason for the job (Para.1) o
_
B
o
x
2
a
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
t
c
Refer to the MMEL TASK: 28-25-02 Fuel Quantity Indicator Refueling Panel (FAA Only) o
_
Refer to the MMEL TASK: 28-12-01-C) Overpressure Protectors in ACT(s) (FAA only) B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
NOTE: c
o
_
The wording used in the AMM title may differ from the MMEL/CDL wording. When it is not possible to B
o
x
use the MMEL/CDL wording in AMM (e.g. because of the AECMA rules (Simplified Technical English), 3
different nomination of part), the “Reason for the Job” paragraph must add additional explanations
V
_
N
that must be consistent with the dispatch condition as reflected in the MMEL/CDL. a
t
c
o
_
B
Personnel Required TABLE o
x
3
The purpose of this table is to have a quick overview of the deactivation task (it is not applicable to a a
reactivation task). V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
The table is generated automatically with: _
N
a
t
c
● The minimum number of persons o

_
B
● The man-hours o
x
1
● The elapsed time V
_
These data are entered by the OAV (On Aircraft Validation) team N
a
t
c
o
NOTE: _
B
o
For the deactivation tasks under engine manufacturer responsibility, the times and number of men x
1
a
must be given by the engine manufacturer with the validation approval. V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
17.8.1.5 Job set-up information _

C
o
p
● In “Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment” paragraph, avoid requirement for
y
r
i
specific tools (unless necessary). g

h
t
_
F
o
o
Check alternative methods when possible. t

e
r
V
_
EXAMPLE: use HYD system rather than Hyd ground cart if possible. N
a
t
c
o
● In “Referenced information” paragraph, The Tasks content must be optimized. _

B
o
x
1
The task optimization is intended to limit the number of cross-references and to eliminate excessive V
_
and not justified cross-references. N

a
t
For more information, refer to Para. 2. B.Job Set-Up Information (Para.2.) (Automatic data entry) c
o
_
B
o
x
1
17.8.1.6 Job set-up a
V
_
This paragraph gives the instructions to put the aircraft in the configuration necessary to do the N
a
t
deactivation task. c
o
_
B
o
Rule: The initial configuration of the aircraft is the configuration at the gate: x
2
• Aircraft on its wheels V

_
•
N
Parking brake applied a
t
•
c
Engines stopped with fan cowls and thrust reversers closed o
_
• Fuel on board (quantity known) B

o
x
• Control surfaces in “clean” configuration 2

a
• Electrical circuits energized V

_
•
N
Hydraulic systems not pressurized a
t
• Air conditioning in operation c

o
_
• All circuit breakers closed B

o
•
x
All controls in NORM, AUTO or OFF position 2
b
• Access to the cockpit and cabin available. V

_
N
a
t
The authors must give the instructions necessary to put the aircraft, system, unit, or test equipment in c
o
_
the configuration for the deactivation task, such as: B
o
•
x
Make sure that the electrical circuits are energized, hydraulic systems pressurized, 3
• Open the circuit breakers or make sure that the circuit breakers are closed. V
_
N
a
t
c
This paragraph must also contain the preparation of tools (such as installation, calibration). o
_
B
o
x
The Job Set-up (as the Close-up) must be simplified to avoid having too many steps. 3
a
When they exist, use the applicable Typical Sentences, which combine several steps. Refer to Typical V
_
N
Sentences. a
t
c
For more information, refer to Para. 2. C.Job Set-Up (Para.3.) o
_
B
o
x
3
17.8.1.7 Procedure b
V
_
N
Refer to Para. Procedure (Para.4) a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
● Text optimization: _
D
o
c
_
C
Ensure that MMEL/CDL requirements are satisfied (NOT LESS NOT MORE!). o
p
y
Eliminate all unnecessary steps r
i
To avoid having too many sentences dealing just with one item, it is recommended to group different g
h
t
sentences in a single step such as: _

F
o
o
t
e
(a) Remove the bolt (5), washer (6), washer (7), bushing (2) and nut (8) to disconnect duct assembly r
(11) from the lower bifurcation panel (12). V

_
N
Or a
t
c
(a) Disconnect the connectors (9) and put blanking caps on the disconnected electrical connectors. o
_
B
(b) Remove the nuts (8), washers (7) and disengage the lugs (6) from the output terminals (5). o
x
1
Add a Note (if appropriate) to facilitate the job. _

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
● System consequences and cockpit effects: o

x
1
If the deactivation affects other system(s) and if this is not readily “visible” to the mechanics, a a
paragraph “System consequences and cockpit effects” must be included at the end of the task listing
V
_
N
a
these effects. t
c
o
_
B
EXAMPLE: o
x
2
V
_
4. Procedure N
a
… t
c
o
C. System Consequences and Cockpit Effects _
B
o
(1) There is no electrical supply at the nose wheel steering deactivation electrical - box, thus: x
2
… a
V
_
N
a
If it concerns only a cockpit effect the paragraph will read “Cockpit effects”. t
c
o
_
B
o
EXAMPLE: x
2
b
V
4. Procedure _
N
…
a
t
c
o
(6) Cockpit effects: _
B
The APU LP Valve symbol shows the transit position on the ECAM FUEL page when the valve is o
x
3
deactivated. V
_
N
a
● Instruction for Placard t

c
o
_
B
o
RULE: x
3
a
Add the instruction to put a placard in the AMM if this is indicated in the MMEL Items section (by the V
_
sign placard on OPS Library Browser (OLB) or by the word 'yes' on the placard column in the MMEL N
a
on PDF). t
c
o
_
B
o
RULE: x
3
b
For the FAA MMEL tasks, the instruction to put a placard in the AMM is mandatory. V
_
N
a
Use a Typical Sentence Ref TS: t
c
o
A320 family/A330/A340: GEN1 _
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A380: GEN 121 _

D
o
Put an applicable placard in position in the cockpit (refer to your standard practices and local c
_
C
regulations). o
p
y
r
i
This instruction informs the flight crew of the condition of the equipment / system which is (are) g
h
t
deactivated. _
F
o
o
t
RULE: e
r
Unless the MMEL dispatch condition requires a specific wording and location, the AMM must not V
_
N
indicate the wording and location of the placard. It is up to the operator to determine its wording and a
t
c
location. o
_
B
o
x
RULE: 1
V
An instruction to remove the placard must be shown in the reactivation task _
N
a
t
c
o
_
17.8.1.8 Close-up. B
o
x
1
The Close-up (as the Job Set-up) must be simplified to avoid having too many steps. a
V
_
N
Try to use Typical Sentences which combine several steps. a

t
c
o
_
B
EXAMPLE for A380: o
x
TS GEN13 “Remove all the fixtures, tools, test and support equipment used during this procedure. “
2
V
_
N
a
For more information, refer to Para. Close-Up (Para.5) t

c
o
_
B
o
EXAMPLE: x
2
5. Close-up a
Subtask 32-21-00-942-014-A _
N
a
A. Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration. t
c
o
(1) In the cockpit: _
B
(a) Remove the WARNING NOTICE(S). o

x
2
(b) Remove the DEVICE, SAFETY- LANDING GEAR CONTROL LEVER (98L32301002000) from the b
V
landing gear control lever. _
N
a
(2) Remove the safety barriers. t
c
(3) Remove all the fixtures, tools, test and support equipment used during this procedure. o
_
B
o
x
3
Entry in the logbook: V
_
RULE: N
a
For deactivation tasks linked to MMEL or CDL, there must be a step that contains the sentence "Make t
c
o
an entry in the logbook": _

B
o
x
3
a
NOTE: V
It is recommended to use this Typical Sentence: _

N
a
● For A320 Family: T020 t

c
● For A330/A340:TS94
o
_
B
● For A380: TS GEN14.

o
x
3
b
EXAMPLE: _
N
a
t
c
o
5. Close-up _
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Subtask 25-51-00-860-006-A _
D
o
A. Put the aircraft back to its initial configuration. c

_
C
(1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and other items. o
p
y
(2) Remove all the fixtures, tools, test and support equipment used during this procedure. r
i
(3) Make an entry in the logbook g

h
t
(4) De-energize the ground service network _

F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
17.8.2 Layout of a reactivation Task D
o
c
_
C
o
p
17.8.2.1 Reactivation task number y
r
i
g
Ensure that all reactivation tasks linked with the MMEL/CDL (m) item must have a function code 440. h
t
_
The reactivation task comes after a deactivation task 040. F
o
o
t
e
r
17.8.2.2 Reactivation TASK title V

_
N
The task title must be in accordance with the deactivation task title and must start with “Reactivation
a
t
c
of”. o
_
B
For more information, Ref. Para. 4.1.2 Task Title. o
x
1
V
_
N
17.8.2.3 General reactivation WARNINGS/CAUTIONS, refer to a
t
c
Warnings/Cautions on Airbus People / Airbus Supply o
_
B
o
x
1
a
17.8.2.3.1 Reason for the job: V
_
N
Consists of the MMEL/CDL item reference and title. a
t
Refer to Deactivation Reason for the job paragraph. For more information, refer to Para. Reason for c
o
_
the job (Para.1) B

o
x
2
V
_
17.8.2.3.2 Job set-up information: N
a
t
c
o
Refer to Deactivation task paragraph in Para. Job Set-Up Information (Para.2.) (Automatic data entry) _
B
o
x
2
a
17.8.2.3.3 Job set-up: V

_
N
a
Refer to Deactivation Job set-up. t
c
o
_
B
o
x
17.8.2.3.4 Procedure: 2
b
V
Refer to Deactivation Procedure paragraph. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
NOTE: x
3
There is no need to make reference to the logbook entry in a Reactivation Task. This is only mandatory V
_
N
for Deactivation Task. a
t
c
o
_
NOTE: B
o
x
Unless requested by the Design Office or the Flight Operation department, it is not necessary to cross- 3
a
refer to the TSM in the Reactivation Task. If it is requested to cross-refer to the TSM and if a specific V
_
TSM reference is not known, use this Typical Sentence: N

a
t
“Do the trouble shooting of the xxx that you deactivated using the Fault Symptom as entry into the c
o
TSM.”
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
17.8.2.3.5 Close-up : _
N
a
t
Refer to Deactivation Close-up. c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
_
C
EXAMPLE OF MMEL PAGE AND HOW TO USE IT o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
MMEL reference and F
o
o
title t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
(m) Purpose of the maintenance x
2
indicates there is a maintenance procedure that the AMM deactivationa
task shall cover. _

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
c
17.8.3 Illustration _
C
o
p
y
The illustration is highly recommended in the AMM task Quick location on aircraft to show the zone, r
i
g
access and panel. h
t
The illustration must contain: _

F
o
● Show tools installation (if required) o

t
● Illustrate the job using FLAG / NOTE if needed (show valve in closed position)
e
r
V
_
N
NOTE: a
t
c
Use an illustration rather than a lot of descriptive text. o

_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
17.8.4 Flying/Deactivation Parts D
o
c
_
C
o
p
y
r
Flying/Deactivation Parts are not tools but certified parts that fly installed on the A/C. They are used i
g
h
to deactivate specific systems and allow dispatch under MMEL (for example spoiler deactivation t
_
F
collar). These parts are certified by a MOD and identified with a FIN. o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
17.8.4.1 Rule for the Flying/Deactivation Parts a

t
c
o
_
B
o
RULE: x
1
The FIN of the flying/deactivation part must be tagged at task level. V

_
N
In the task, the part must be tagged as expendable to have a direct link to the IPC figure. a
t
c
The AMM author must contact the IPC author to request the creation of the IPC illustration with the o
_
flying part. B
o
x
1
a
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
17.8.4.2 Rule for Illustration of Flying/Deactivation Parts t

c
o
_
RULE: B
o
x
An illustration must show the installation of the flying/deactivation part: 3
b
● It must be shown in “CYAN”. (As the part is not a tool, it must not be shown in amber color). V
_
● The FIN of the part must be shown. N

a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
17.8.5 Deactivation / Reactivation task not linked to MMEL or AFM – CDL item
_
D
o
c
_
A deactivation/Reactivation task may not be linked to any MMEL or CDL item. C
o
p
RULE: y
r
In the deactivation task, the Reason for the Job must show: i
g
h
● The purpose of the task t

_
F
● The following Note: o
o
“NOTE: This deactivation task is not related to an AFM-CDL/MMEL item”

t
e
r
In the reactivation task, the Reason for the Job must only show the purpose of the task. V
_
N
a
t
EXAMPLE: c
o
_
B
o
x
1
TASK 32-51-00-040-XXX-A V
_
Deactivation of the Nose Wheel Steering N
a
1. t
c
o
Reason for the Job _
B
o
This task supplies the data to deactivate the Nose Wheel Steering for maintenance. x
1
a
NOTE: This deactivation task is not related to an AFM-CDL/MMEL item V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
17.9 Page Blocks Related to Cabin BFE and Cabin Monument D
o
c
Disassembly/Assembly _
C
o
p
AMM ATA 25 must cover only the instructions for removal and installation of Buyer Furnished y
r
i
Equipment (BFE) and cabin monuments. g
h
t
_
F
RULE: o
o
t
For BFE and cabin monument disassembly tasks: e

r
For components that have to be disassembled for subsequent removal from its location on the aircraft V
_
N
or from the aircraft (for example galley split line), make a reference to the applicable CMMv. a
t
In the component disassembly subtask, this step must be incorporated: c

o
_
- For the disassembly of the “component designation”, Ref. CMMv B

o
x
XXXXXX/XXXXX. 1
V
In the component assembly subtask, this step must be incorporated: _
N
- For the assembly of the “component designation”, Ref. CMMv XXXXXX/XXXXX. a

t
c
o
_
B
o
EXAMPLE: x
1
a
Subtask 25-31-23-010-007 V
_
N
a
G. Galley Disassembly t
c
o
(1)For the disassembly of the galley, Ref. CMMV XXXXXX/XXXXX. _

B
o
x
(2) Make match marks on the components that you disconnect/remove to record their 2
V
connections/positions. This is important for the subsequent installation task. _
N
a
… t
c
o
_
4. Procedure B
o
x
Subtask 25-31-23-410-001 2
a
A. Galley Assembly V
_
N
(1) Make sure that the parts retained from the removed component are clean and in the a
t
c
correct condition. o
_
B
o
(2) Do a visual inspection and clean the component interface and/or the adjacent area. x
2
b
(3) For the assembly of the galley, Ref. CMMV XXXXXX /XXXXX. V
_
(4) When you connect/install the components, refer to the match marks made during the N
a
t
removal procedure. c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
RULE: _
N
a
Use standard practices to reduce the complexity of the task. The task must indicate the galley zone t
c
o
having these sub-equipment. _
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
RULE: c
_
C
Simplify the weight information. o
p
y
Avoid precise weight subject to configuration and add a Note to provide the information how many r
i
persons are required to do the job. g

h
t
_
F
o
EXAMPLE: o
t
e
Component weight r
The weight of the equipment is approximately 60 Kg (132 lb). V

_
N
NOTE: Two persons are necessary for this task. a

t
c
o
_
B
o
x
RULE: 1
Show the sequence of the tasks to be recorded by the mechanic. _

N
a
The beginning of the task has to mention that the sequence of the task has to be recorded by the t
c
o
mechanic. If applicable, the task has to also mention that the procurable parts have to be stored. The _
B
task has to mention the attachment fittings to be removed for the part removal. Make sure that the o
x
1
IPC covers the respective parts. a
V
_
N
a
RULE: t
c
Do not mention parts numbers of the parts belonging to the BFE (such as pneumatic air-distribution- o
_
B
subsystem filters) in the task. o

x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
RULE for illustration: _

D
o
The illustration associated to the removal / installation task must be as generic as possible. It must c
_
C
clearly indicate its applicability on the component. o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
18 Page Block 501 Adjustment / Test

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
18.1 General y
r
i
g
Adjustment/Test tasks are provided to satisfy the Maintenance Planning Document (MPD) Trouble h
t
_
Shooting Manual (TSM) requirements and to ensure that system / sub-system / sub-sub-system F
o
o
maintenance has been completed satisfactorily. t
e
r
NOTE: _
N
a
c
o
to MP related to MPD Requirements). _
B
o
x
1
Adjustment/Test Page Blocks may be written at system (chapter) / sub-system / sub-sub-system or V

_
component (subject) level. If several tasks are contained in one Page Block, each task must form a N
a
t
complete block of information (TASK) which may be disassociated from any other task. c
o
_
B
o
There are two types of Tasks that concern either Adjustment (Function Code 820) or Tests x
1
a
(Operational Functional System or BITE Tests) with function codes in the 700 series. Refer to V
_
UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM (AMTOSS). N
a
t
c
o
_
B
18.2 Text o
x
2
General policy applicable to maintenance tasks also applies to these Page Blocks. V
_
N
As a general rule for the test tasks, each test must be laid-out in two columns and written like a check a
t
c
list (ACTION/RESULT Table). o
_
Refer to Test Task. B

o
x
2
a
18.3 Illustrations _
N
a
t
c
General policy applicable to maintenance tasks also applies to these Page Blocks. o
_
Specifically utilization of test sets must be illustrated to show precise connections to the aircraft and B
o
x
any usage indication. 2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
18.4 Layout D
o
c
_
Refer to PRD0002.0 AMM and AM Product Definition. The Title includes in its second part C
o
“Adjustment/Test”.
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
18.4.1 Breakdown of an Adjustment Task F
o
o
t
Adjusting, aligning, calibrating (function code 820) consists of making a physical correction to ensure e
r
proper placement operation or testing of a system or component. Rigging pertains to hooking up, V
_
arranging or adjusting. N
a
t
c
o
_
NOTE: B
o
x
Any minor adjustment Subtask which must be accomplished as a result of installation of a component 1
has to be covered in the removal/installation Page Block and the steps must be in sequential order V
_
N
included in one Subtask as far as possible. Where necessary rigging points must be indicated with a
t
c
adjustment values and tolerances. o
_
B
o
x
1
a
18.4.1.1 Task Title _

N
a
t
c
The title may be allocated by the system but can be changed by the author if necessary. It generally o
_
includes the word Adjustment associated to the code 820. B

o
x
Refer to UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM 2
V
(AMTOSS). _
N
a
It includes the FIN(s). t
c
o
_
B
EXAMPLE: o
x
2
a
V
TASK 27-24-00-820-801-A _
N
Adjustment of the Rudder Position Transducer-Units a

t
c
o
_
B
FIN : 5CY , 6CY o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
18.4.1.2 General Adjustment WARNINGS/CAUTIONS _

D
o
c
_
C
o
Refer to Warnings/Cautions. p
y
r
Includes general WARNINGS/CAUTIONS applicable to the concerned adjustment task. i

g
h
t
_
F
EXAMPLE o
o
t
e
r
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE SAFETY DEVICES AND THE WARNING NOTICES ARE IN V
_
POSITION BEFORE YOU START A TASK ON OR NEAR: N
a
t
- THE FLIGHT CONTROLS c
o
- THE FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES _

B
o
- THE LANDING GEAR AND RELATED DOORS x

1
- COMPONENTS THAT MOVE. V

_
N
a
t
MOVEMENT OF COMPONENTS CAN KILL OR CAUSE INJURY TO PERSONS AND CAN CAUSE c
o
_
DAMAGE. B
o
x
WARNING: MAKE SURE THAT THE TRAVEL RANGES OF THE FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES 1
a
ARE CLEAR. MOVEMENT OF THE FLIGHT CONTROL SURFACES CAN CAUSE INJURY TO V
_
PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR EQUIPMENT. N

a
t
c
o
_
B
18.4.1.3 Reason for the Job o

x
2
Refer to Para. 2. A. Reason for the job (Para.1.) V

_
N
a
t
c
EXAMPLE o
_
B
o
x

a
To adjust the position transducer units after their replacement. V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
18.4.1.4 Job Set-up Information x
2
b
Refer to Para. 2. B. Job Set-Up Information (Para.2.) (Automatic data entry) V

_
N
a
t
The following paragraphs extracted from the text coding can be found in the Job Set-Up Information c
o
_
of an adjustment task: B
o
x
3
●
V
Fixtures Tools Test and Support Equipment: Refer to Para. Fixtures Tools Test and _
N
Support Equipment a
t
c
● Consumable Materials. Refer to Para. Consumable Materials o

_
B
● Work Zones and Access Panels. Refer to Para. Work Zones and Access Panels o
x
●
3
Expendable Parts: Refer to Para. Expendable Parts a
● Referenced Information: Refer to Para. Referenced Information V

_
N
a
t
c
o
18.4.1.5 Job Set-up _

B
o
x
Refer to Para. Job Set-Up (Para.3) 3

b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
18.4.1.6 Procedure _
D
o
c
_
Refer to Para. Procedure (Para.4) C
o
Tasks must be self-contained and be provided in logical sequential steps and broken down into p
y
r
Subtasks (Refer to UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT i

g
h
SYSTEM (AMTOSS)). t
_
F
o
o
NOTE: t
e
r
You may refer to a Test in an adjustment task. V

_
N
a
t
EXAMPLE of an adjustment procedure c
o
_
B
o
4. Procedure x
1
Subtask 25-24-00-820-002-A V
_
N
A. Adjustment of the Bin for the Moveable Overhead-Stowage-Compartment (OHSC) (referred to as a
t
the bin) c
o
_
(Ref. Fig. Moveable OHSC Bin (Manually Operated) SHEET 1) B

o
x
(1) Fully open the bin (1). 1
a
(2) Adjust the bin: V

_
(a) Turn the screw (2): N

a
t
- Counterclockwise to move the bin (1) down c

o
_
- Clockwise to move the bin (1) up. B
o
…
x
2
Subtask 25-24-00-710-003-A V
_
N
B. Operational Test a
t
c
(1) Do the operational test of the bin (Ref. AMM TASK 25-24-00-710-802) . o
_
B
o
x
EXAMPLE of a Subtask Operational Test (Function code 720) in and Adjustment Task (Function code 2
a
820) V
_
N
a
t
c
TASK 25-15-51-820-801 o
_
Adjustment of the Captain/First Officer Foot-Warmer Temperature B

o
x
… 2
b
4. Procedure V
_
N
(Ref. Fig. 501/TASK 25-15-51-991-002 SHEET 501.1) a
t
Subtask 25-15-51-820-050 c
o
_
A. Adjustment of the Captain/First Officer Foot-Warmer Temperature B

o
x
… 3
V
Subtask 25-15-51-720-050 _
N
C. Do this operational test: a

t
c
(1) On the CAPT lighting control panel 513VU, set the CAPT FOOT WARMER switch 3DR1 to the o
_
B
ON position. o
x
3
(2) Make sure that the foot warmer operates. a
(3) On the F/O lighting control panel 514VU, set the F/O FOOT WARMER switch 3DR2 to the ON V
_
N
position. a
t
c
(4) Make sure that the foot warmer operates. o
_
B
o
x
3
b
18.4.1.7 Close-up V
_
N
Refer to Para. Close-Up (Para.5) a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
18.4.2 Breakdown of Test Tasks D
o
c
_
An example of a complete test task is given at the end of this part: EXAMPLE of a test task in A380 C
o
Refer to UG2100280.4 – AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM

p
y
r
(AMTOSS) – Function Codes 710 to 790. i

g
h
t
_
F
o
There are four types of tests: o

t
e
r
●
V
Operational Test (Function Code 710) _
N
a
t
c
EXAMPLE: o
_
B
TASK 21-31-00-710-801-A o
x
1
Operational Test of the Outflow Valve Closing in Ditching Configuration V
_
N
a
t
● Functional Test (Function Code 720) c

o
_
B
o
x
EXAMPLE: 1
a
TASK 25-69-00-720-801-A V
_
N
Functional Test of the Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) Antenna a
t
c
o
_
B
● System Test (Function code 730) o

x
2
EXAMPLE: V
_
TASK 27-22-00-730-001 N
a
t
System Test of the Rudder Trim c
o
_
B
o
x
2
NOTE: a
V
On A380, there are no System Tests with Function Code 730. They are all BITE Test (Function code _
N
a
740) and System Test is indicated in brackets in the title of the task. Other BITE Tests that are not t
c
System Test are interactive tests via the OMT. o

_
B
o
x
●
2
BITE test (including Power-up test or Multipurpose Control and Display unit (MCDU) b
V
System Test in connection with Central Maintenance System (CMS) (**ON LR and _
N
A380) or Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS) (**ON SA ONLY)). (Function Code a
t
c
740) o
_
B
o
x
3
EXAMPLE: V
TASK 21-21-00-740-801-A _
N
a
BITE Test of the Ventilation Control System (VCS) (System Test) t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
EXAMPLE: a
TASK 29-31-00-740-801-A V
_
N
BITE Test of the Hydraulic system / HSMU a
t
c
o
_
B
The following layout is applicable for the four types of test (Operational Test, Functional Test, System o
x
Test and BITE Test). If it is necessary to cover the four types of test in the same Page Block the 3
b
presentation must be: firstly the operational test and/or BITE test secondly the functional test and V
_
N
thirdly the system test. a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
NOTE: c
_
C
Test tasks are described in this manual according to component and associated test sets which have o
p
y
been considered by Airbus. Buyer r
i
Furnished Equipment (BFE) is taken into consideration but with Tool/Equipment as selected by AI. In g
h
t
the event that the tool or test equipment _

F
o
Part Numbers which are listed in the Para Job Set-Up Information of Adjustment/Test P. Blocks do o
t
e
not correspond with those used by the Operator the appropriate task must be prepared by the r
Operator in compliance with the Guidelines for Customer Originated Changes under his own technical V
_
N
responsibility (Ref. PRD0002.0 Para. Incorporation of Customer Originated Change). a

t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
18.4.2.1 Task Title V

_
N
a
The title may be allocated by the system but can be changed by the author if necessary. t
c
o
It can include the words: _
B
● Operational Test o
x
1
● Functional Test a
● System Test
V
_
N
● BITE Test
a
t
c
o
_
B
It includes the FIN(s). o

x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
18.4.2.2 General Test WARNINGS/CAUTIONS o
_
B
o
Refer to Warnings/Cautions. x
2
a
Includes general WARNINGS/CAUTIONS applicable to the concerned test task. V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
18.4.2.3 Reason for the Job B

o
x
2
Refer to Para. Reason for the job (Para.1.) b
V
_
N
a
EXAMPLE: t
c
o
_
B

x
3
To do a check of the integrity of the hydraulic-system electrical parts V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
18.4.2.4 Job Set-up Information _

D
o
c
_
Refer to Para. 2. B. Job Set-Up Information (Para.2) (Automatic data entry). C
o
The following paragraphs extracted from the text coding can be found in the Job Set-Up Information p
y
r
of an Installation task: i
g
h
t
_
●
F
Fixtures, Tools, Test and Support Equipment: Refer to Para. Fixtures Tools Test and o
o
Support Equipment. t
e
r
● Consumable Materials: Refer to Para. Consumable Materials. V

_
● Work Zones and Access Panels: Refer to Para. Work Zones and Access Panels N
a
●
t
Expendable Parts: Refer to Para. Expendable Parts c
o
● Referenced Information: Refer to Para. Referenced Information _

B
o
x
1
18.4.2.5 Job Set-up _

N
a
t
Refer to Para. Job Set-Up (Para.3.) c

o
_
B
o
x
1
18.4.2.6 Procedure a
V
_
As a general rule, for the test tasks, each test must be laid-out in two columns and written like a check N
a
t
list. c
o
_
B
o
x
The LH column has to state the actions to be performed and the associated locations. The RH column 2
states the results from these actions including specific location of occurrences. Any legends or labels V
_
N
on panels must be written as they are on the panels in capital letters. a

t
c
o
_
B
Tasks are to be given in logical sequential steps broken down where necessary into Subtasks (Ref. o
x
UG2100280.4 TASK SUBTASK NUMBERING SYSTEM). 2

a
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
o
_
4. Procedure B
o
x
Subtask 24-00-00-710-050 2
b
A. Energization of the Aircraft with the Batteries 1 and 2 V

_
N
a
t
c
ACTION RESULT o
_
B
o
1. On the ELEC control panel 35VU: On the ELEC control panel 35VU: x
3
- - V
_
Push the AC ESS FEED, BUS TIE and GALLEY The AVAIL legend of the EXT POWER N
a
pushbutton switches pushbutton switch comes on t

c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
- - The battery voltmeters must show a voltage
Release the EXT POWER pushbutton switch V
_
of 28 volts. N
a
t
c
o
_
B
- o
Push the BAT 1 and BAT 2 pushbutton switches. x

3
b
V
_
N
a
t
Action/Result Table c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
The Action/Result Table is predefined in the authoring tool. _

D
o
c
_
C
If it is necessary to remove another component for access either refer to the appropriate removal o
p
y
TASK or specify the required removal steps. (Refer to Para. Procedure in Page Block 201 for details r
i
and examples). g
h
t
The task must include WARNINGS/CAUTIONS related to specific steps of task. _

F
o
o
t
e
NOTE 1: r
Compliance with the following test can in some instances cause duplication of test operation. V
_
N
a
t
c
NOTE 2: o
_
B
The direct use of Ground Test Instructions (GTI) has to be reconsidered in terms of simplification to o
x
ensure a workable task for operators; this includes reassessment of tolerances acceptable for in 1
service A/C. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
● Operational Test o
x
1
AMTOSS Function Code: 710 a
V
_
N
a
That task required to ascertain only that a system or unit is operable. These tests must not require t
c
any special equipment or facilities other than that installed on the aircraft and must be comparable to o
_
B
the tests performed by the flight crews. o

x
2
V
_
It is not intended that the operational test of the unit must meet the specifications and tolerances N
a
ordinarily established for overhaul or major maintenance periods. A test can be carried out where t
c
o
appropriate with ground hydraulic electrical and/or air conditioning connections made to the aircraft. _
B
o
x
2
a
ATTENTION: A test required to ascertain only that a System Subsystem or Component is operational V
but requires special tool/equipment is also an Operational Test _

N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
EXAMPLE: _
D
o
c
_
C
4. Procedure o
p
y
Subtask 33-46-00-710-050 r
i
A. Operational Test of Lights g

h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
ACTION RESULT V
_
N
a
t
1. On the panel 25VU: On the nose landing c

o
_
gear: B
o
- Set the NOSE selector switch x
1
to TAXI, - The taxi light comes V

_
on, N
a
t
c
o
- Set the NOSE selector switch _

B
o
to TO, - The taxi and take off x

1
a
lights come on, V
_
N
a
- Set the NOSE selector switch t

c
o
to OFF. - The taxi and take off _
B
o
lights go off. x
2
● Functional Test V
_
N
AMTOSS Function Code: 720 a

t
c
o
_
B
That task required to ascertain that a system or unit is functioning in all aspects in accordance with o
x
minimum acceptable system or unit design specifications. These tests may require supplemental 2
a
ground support equipment and are more specific and detailed than an operational test. It must contain V
_
N
all necessary information to perform proficiency tests to maintain system or unit reliability at an a
t
c
acceptable level without reference to additional documents. o
_
B
o
x
NOTE: 2
b
If the test is short it can be presented without the table ACTION/RESULT. V

_
N
a
t
EXAMPLE: c
o
_
4. Procedure B
o
x
Subtask 32-45-00-720-001-A 3
A. Functional Test of the Yellow Alternate Braking Accumulator System with the Parking Brake ON. V
_
N
NOTE: This test does a check for hydraulic leakage of the parking brake system with the parking brake a
t
c
set to ON. o
_
B
(1) Wait for two hours. o
x
3
(2) In the cockpit (zone 210), do this test: a
(a) On the OMT, get access to the OMS Home page V

_
N
(Ref. AMM TASK 45-00-00-860-801) . a
t
c
1 Select ATA32. o
_
2 Select BSCS Real Time Monitoring (RTM). B

o
x
3 Select View BLG LEHGS. 3

b
4 On the RTM screen, read and make a record of the accumulators pressure. V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
● System Test: c
_
C
AMTOSS Function Code: 730 o
p
y
r
i
That task containing all adjustment specifications and tolerances required maintaining system and/or g
h
t
unit performance at maximum efficiency and design specifications. It must be self-contained and may _
F
o
duplicate other tests. o
t
e
r
V
_
N
EXAMPLE: a
t
c
4. Procedure o
_
B
Subtask 27-41-00-730-050 o
x
A. System Test of the THS Actuator Electrical Control 1
V
_
N
a
t
ACTION RESULT c
o
_
B
o
x
1. On the center pedestal: On the lower ECAM display unit, 1
a
on the F/CTL page: V
- Move the pitch-trim control _

N
a
wheel to the 4 DN position. - On the PITCH TRIM indicator t
c
o
the value shown is included _
B
between 3.5 and 4.3 deg. o

x
2
V
_
N
NOTE: a
t
c
On A380 there are no System Tests with Function Code 730. They are all BITE Test (Function code o
_
B
740) and System Test is indicated in brackets in the title of the Task. o
x
2
a
Other BITE Tests that are not System Test are interactive tests via the OMT (see example below). V
_
N
a
t
c
EXAMPLE: o
_
4. Procedure B
o
x
Subtask 24-72-00-740-001-A 2
b
A.BITE Test of the PEPDC (System Test) V

_
N
NOTE: During the test, obey the instructions shown on the terminal. a
t
c
o
_
B
o
ACTION RESULT x
3
1.On the OMT, on the OMS Home page, _

N
a
select: t
c
o
- _
B
SYSTEM REPORT/TEST o
x
3
a
- V
ATA 24 _
N
a
t
c
- o
_
PEPDC application B
o
x
3
b
-
The applicable PEPDC V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
- o
System Test . c
_
C
o
p
y
2.Start the test. The test is in progress. r
i
g
Indication that test is OK comes into view. h

t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
● BITE Test: V
_
AMTOSS Function Code: 740. N
a
t
c
o
That test conducted using Built-In Test Equipment, the Central Maintenance System (CMS) (**ON LR _
B
o
ONLY) or the Centralized Fault Display System (CFDS) (**ON SA ONLY). x
1
V
_
N
EXAMPLE of an interactive test in A380: a
t
c
o
_
4. Procedure B
o
x
Subtask 29-31-00-740-001-A 1
a
A. BITE Test of the HSMU V

_
NOTE: During this procedure, if an error message is shown, record this message. Then do the related N
a
t
trouble shooting procedure. c
o
_
NOTE: During the test, obey the instructions shown on the terminal. B
o
x
2
V
ACTION RESULT _
N
a
1.On the OMT, on the OMS Home page, select: t
c
o
- _
B
SYSTEM REPORT/TEST o
x
2
a
- V
ATA 29 - Hydraulic Power General _
N
a
t
- c
HSMU o
_
B
o
x
- 2
The applicable HSMU b
V
_
N
- a
Tests t
c
o
_
B
- o
System test x
3
V
_
N
2.Start the system test. The test is in progress. a
t
Indication that test is OK comes into view. c
o
_
(Test OK means there is no BITE message). B
o
x
3.Close the SYSTEM REPORT/TEST application. The OMS Home page comes into view again. 3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
18.4.2.7 Close-up x
3
b
Refer to Para. Close-Up (Para.5) V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
19 Page Block 601 Inspection / Check

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
19.1 General y
r
i
g
Inspection/Check tasks are provided to satisfy the Maintenance Planning Document (MPD) including h
t
_
Zonal Inspections and Trouble Shooting Manual (TSM) requirements. They can also cover various F
o
o
tasks as necessary. t
e
r
NOTE 1: _
N
a
c
o
to MP related to MPD Requirements). _
B
o
x
1
NOTE 2: V
_
Page Blocks 05-20-00 and subsequent must include data covering Scheduled Maintenance N
a
t
Checks/Zonal Inspection. c
o
_
B
o
NOTE 3: x
1
a
Page Blocks 05-50-00 and subsequent must include data covering Unscheduled Maintenance V
_
Checks/Inspection. N
a
t
c
o
These tasks must contain permissible damage limits for which no repair or approved repair task is _
B
o
necessary. x
2
V
_
N
Several types of Inspection/Check have to be considered: a
t
c
o
_
● Inspection/Check without removal of components from the aircraft. B

o
x
2
a
These P. Blocks must cover: V

_
N
a
t
>
Visual Inspection/Check (cracks damage corrosion condition of sealant and c
o
_
paint). Example: Cracks up to XX mm (XX.X in.) length are to be stop drilled. B
o
x
> Inspection/Check by means of measurements (displacement travel overall 2
b
clearances leak measurements). V

_
The tasks must be rapid and simple (such as pin-rigging travel range clearance N
a
t
measurements). c
o
_
B
o
x
3
● Inspection/Check further to the removal of components from the aircraft. V

_
N
These P. Blocks must cover the original manufacturing and in service wear limits (Fits and a
t
c
Clearances) in table form. In service wear limits define the rejection criteria for the relevant o
_
component. B
o
x
3
a
● Special Inspection for corrosion V

_
N
a
t
NOTE: c
o
_
Subsequent to an unsatisfactory inspection or check result the user must be directed per cross- B
o
x
reference to the TASK containing the corrective action. 3
b
V
_
N
a
t
EXAMPLE: c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
REFERENCE DESIGNATION o
c
_
C
27-21-00-210-801 Detailed Inspection of the Rudder Mechanical Control (for o

p
y
corrective action) r
i
g
h
t
_
F
o
o
t
e
r
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
19.2 Text and Illustrations D
o
c
_
The general policy applicable to maintenance tasks also applies to these Page Blocks. C
o
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
_
19.2.1 Text F
o
o
t
e
r
For fit and clearances information: V

_
N
a
t
● The data must be presented in tabular format. c

o
_
B
o
x
EXAMPLE: 1
V
_
N
a
Original Manufacturing Limits In-Service Wear Limits t

c
Fig. o
_
B
Detail Dimension Assembly Clearance Dimension Limits Max. o

x
1
and mm (in.) mm (in.) mm (in.) Allow. a
Item Clearance V
_
N
No. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. mm (in.) a

t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
A V
_
N
OD 3 a
t
c
A o
_
ID 1 B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
NOTE: o
_
B
The various clearances and conversions must be calculated by the author. o

x
2
b
V
A380 TASK 321800 -220 -801 _
N
a
t
c
o
_
CONTROL CLEARANCE HEIGHT DIFFERENCE B
o
POINT x
3
V
_
N
P5 12 +5 -5 mm (0.47 +0.20 -0.20 in.) 0 +3.3 -2.1 mm (0.00 +0.13 -0.08 in.) a
t
c
o
_
B
P52 12 +5 -5 mm (0.47 +0.20 -0.20 in.) 0 +2.1 -3.3 mm (0.00 +0.08 -0.13 in.) o
x
3
a
P61 6.5 +3.5 -3.5 mm (0.25 +0.14 -0.14 in.) 0 +3.5 -3.5 mm (0.00 +0.14 -0.14 in.) V
_
N
a
t
c
P63 15 +3.5 -3.5 mm (0.59 +0.14 -0.14 in.) 0 +3.5 -3.5 mm (0.00 +0.14 -0.14 in.) o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
19.2.2 Illustration D
o
c
_
C
o
p
RULE: y
r
For inspection tasks, a 2D illustration is mandatory to show the inspection area. i

g
h
For inspection tasks related to Beluga XL, it is not allowed to refer to 3DJuump for the inspection area. t
_
F
A 2D illustration is mandatory to show the inspection area. o
o
t
e
r
NOTE: V
_
Use the illustration to locate the control points. The illustration gives you an estimated allocation N
a
t
c
o
●
_
The illustrations must provide all the information required for locating and identifying the various B
o
items covered in the text. Each table and associated illustration must be self-sufficient and under x
1
no circumstances must cross-references be made to other tables. V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
19.3 Layout D
o
c
_
C
o
p
19.3.1 Title of the Page Block y
r
i
g
Refer to PRD0002.0 AMM and AM Product Definition h

t
_
F
o
o
t
19.3.2 Breakdown of Inspection / Check Task e

r
V
_
N
a
TASK (Refer to PRD0002.0 Para. AMTOSS TASK Titles and UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT t
c
o
MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM (AMTOSS)) _
B
o
x
1
Includes: V
_
● TASK number N
a
t
The unique number (5th element) is allocated by the system. c
o
_
B
o
● TASK title x
1
a
The title may be allocated by the system but can be changed by the author if necessary. It includes V
_
the FIN(s). N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
General Inspection/Check WARNINGS/CAUTIONS x
2
_
N
Includes general WARNINGS/CAUTIONS applicable to the concerned adjustment TASK. a
t
c
o
_
Reason for the Job B
o
x
Refer to Para. Reason for the job (Para.1.) 2
a
Refer to TDG0037.10 - A380 MPD Zonal Tasks (**ON A380 ONLY) V

_
Refer to UG2100280.9 – Structural Scheduled Maintenance Tasks N

a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
Job Set-up Information V

_
Refer to Para. 2. B. Job Set-Up Information (Para.2.) (Automatic data entry) N

a
t
Refer to TDG0037.10 - A380 MPD Zonal Tasks (**ON A380 ONLY) c
o
Refer to UG2100280.9 – Structural Scheduled Maintenance Tasks

_
B
o
x
3
Job Set-up V
_
N
Refer to Para. Job Set-Up (Para.3.) a
t
c
Refer to TDG0037.10 - A380 MPD Zonal Tasks (**ON A380 ONLY) o
_
Refer to UG2100280.9 – Structural Scheduled Maintenance Tasks B

o
x
3
a
Procedure V
_
N
Refer to TDG0037.10 - A380 MPD Zonal Tasks (**ON A380 ONLY) a
t
Refer to TUG2100280.9 – Structural Scheduled Maintenance Tasks c

o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
EXAMPLE: c
_
C
o
p
y
TASK 05-23-30-200-005 r
i
Zonal Inspection of the Elevator g

h
t
… _
F
o
4. Procedure o
t
e
Subtask 05-23-30-210-054 r
A. Inspection V
_
N
(1) Do a general visual inspection of the elevator. a

t
c
(2) Make sure that there are no signs of corrosion, cracks or damage. o
_
B
(3) Make sure that all the installations (wiring, ducting, piping) are attached correctly. o
x
1
Tasks are to be given in logical sequential steps and broken down into subtasks (Ref. UG2100280.4 _
N
a
- AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM (AMTOSS)). t
c
o
_
B
If it is necessary to remove another component for access either refer to the appropriate removal o
x
1
task or specify the required removal steps (Refer to Para. Procedure in Page Block 201 for further a
V
details and examples). Includes WARNINGS/CAUTIONS related to specific steps of task. _
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
EXAMPLE: V
_
N
a
TASK 53-15-11-200-001 t
c
o
Detailed Inspection of the Radome _

B
o
… x
2
a
4. Procedure V
_
N
Subtask 53-15-11-220-050 a
t
A. Inspection of the Outer Face for all Types of Radome c

o
_
… B
o
x
Subtask 53-15-11-220-052 2
b
B. Inspection of the Inner Face for all Types of Radome V

_
… N
a
t
c
o
_
Close-up B
o
x
Refer to Para. 2. E. Close-Up (Para.5.) 3
Refer to TDG0037.10 - A380 MPD Zonal Tasks (**ON A380 ONLY) V

_
N
Refer to UG2100280.9 – Structural Scheduled Maintenance Tasks a

t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
20 Page Block 701 Cleaning / Painting

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
20.1 General y
r
i
g
Cleaning/Painting tasks are provided to cover corrective measures for contaminated structure and h
t
_
components. F
o
o
General cleaning/painting tasks are also to be applied after contamination of the structure by t
e
r
waste fuel hydraulic and battery fluid and other corrosive paints in Chapter 51. V
_
N
a
Cleaning/painting tasks which require special precautions related to landing gear, furnishings or t
c
o
engine must be covered in the appropriate chapter Page Block. _
B
o
x
1
V
20.2 Text and illustration _
N
a
t
General policy applicable to MP also applies to these P. Blocks. c

o
_
B
o
x
1
20.3 Layout a
V
_
N
a
t
20.3.1 Title of the Page Block c

o
_
B
Refer to PRD0002.0 AMM and AM Product Definition. o

x
2
V
_
N
20.3.2 Breakdown of Cleaning / Painting Task a

t
c
o
_
TASK (Refer to UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM B
o
(AMTOSS)) x
2
a
V
_
Includes: N
a
●
t
TASK number c
o
● The unique number (5th element) is allocated by the system. _

B
o
● TASK title x
2
b
V
_
The title may be allocated by the system but can be changed by the author if necessary. It includes N
a
the FIN(s). t
c
o
_
B
o
General Cleaning/Painting WARNINGS/CAUTIONS x
3
_
Includes general WARNINGS/CAUTIONS applicable to the concerned Cleaning/Painting task. N

a
t
c
o
_
Reason for the job B
o
x
Refer to Para. Reason for the job (Para.1.) 3
a
V
_
Job Set-up Information N

a
t
c
o
_
NOTE: B
o
The following lists included in this heading are generated by the system; the information is extracted x
3
b
from the text coding and various files. V

_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Fixtures Tools Test and Support Equipment (Ref. Para. Fixtures Tools Test and Support _
D
o
Equipment) c
_
C
o
p
y
Includes part number and designation of specific tools and equipment and designation only of common r
i
tools that must be collected at start of the cleaning/painting task. Does not include mechanic standard g
h
t
tools. _
F
o
o
t
e
Consumable Materials (Ref. Para. Consumable Materials) r
Includes code and general designation of Consumable Materials that must be collected at start of the V
_
N
cleaning/painting task. Does not include brushes, cleaning cloths. a

t
c
o
_
B
Expendable Parts (Ref. Para. Expendable Parts) o
x
1
Referenced information (Ref. Para. Referenced information) _

N
a
t
c
o
Job Set-up _
B
Refer to Para. Job Set-Up (Para.3) o

x
1
a
V
_
N
a
Procedure t
c
Tasks must be given in logical sequential steps and broken down into subtasks (Refer to o
_
B
UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM (AMTOSS)). o

x
2
●
_
Cleaning: AMTOSS Function code: 100. N
a
● Painting: AMTOSS Function code: 370. t

c
o
_
B
o
EXAMPLE x
2
a
TASK 57-71-11-100-001 _
N
a
Cleaning and Painting of the Spoiler 1 t

c
…
o
_
B
o
4. Procedure x
2
Subtask 57-71-11-110-052 b
V
_
N
a
CAUTION: DO NOT APPLY TOO MUCH PRESSURE WITH YOUR HAND OR YOU WILL CAUSE t
c
o
DAMAGE TO THE PAINT. _
B
o
x
3
A. Cleaning V
…
_
N
a
t
Subtask 57-71-11-370-050 c
o
B. Painting _
B
o
… x
3
a
V
_
If it is necessary to remove another component for access either refer to the appropriate N
a
removal task or specify the required removal steps (Refer to Para. Procedure in Page Block t
c
o
201 for further details and examples) _

B
o
x
3
b
Includes WARNINGS/CAUTIONS related to specific steps of task. V
_
N
a
● After cleaning/painting task it could be necessary to perform a test. t

c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
D
o
The test that is specifically required to be carried out following cleaning/painting, must be sufficient to c
_
C
ensure that the concerned basic function is correct. Splitting in Subtasks must be limited to functions o
p
y
861 to 869. r
i
g
h
t
Tasks have to be broken down into subtasks (Refer to UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE _
F
o
TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM (AMTOSS)). o
t
e
r
Close-up V
_
N
Refer to Para. Close-Up (Para.5.) a

t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
21 Page Block 801 Approved Repairs

_
D
o
c
_
C
o
p
21.1 General y
r
i
g
Repairs included in the Maintenance Manual are those that may be approved by: h
t
_
F
o
●
o
A supplier- for a repair to his manufactured component that can be performed on the t
e
r
aircraft. V
● The aircraft manufacturer - for a minor repair to a manufacturer-made non-structural _

N
a
component that can be performed on the aircraft. t

c
o
_
B
o
Approved Repairs in the AMM are minor repairs such as stop drilling blending which can be x
1
accomplished on assemblies and/or components in situ including the replacement of riveted items V
_
such as brackets, seals, hinges requiring specific accomplishment instructions. N

a
t
c
o
_
The IPC is the governing document for riveted items covered in the AMM. B
o
x
1
a
Repairs affecting the primary or secondary structures or repairs which need accomplishment off A/C V
_
must not be included in the AMM. N
a
t
c
o
To prevent duplication of data which either already exists or planned for the SRM it is mandatory to _
B
o
crosscheck the Technical Publications Work Sharing Document (TPWD) of the SRM and to coordinate x
2
with the SRM responsible department. V

_
N
a
t
Other major repairs or repairs that cannot be accomplished on the aircraft will be included in the c
o
_
aircraft manufacturers/vendor CMM and for aircraft structure in the SRM. B

o
x
2
a
Components, structural parts or areas where Approved Repairs may be performed include for V
_
example: N
a
t
c
o
●
_
Non-metallic strip seals, where part of the strip seal is damaged. B
o
x
2
b
● Fillet and overcoat sealing of leak areas inside and outside of structurally integral fuel V
_
tanks must include temporary repairs to allow the aircraft to return to base. It must not N
a
t
include repairs to interface sealing of the integral tanks which is to be included in the c
o
_
SRM. B
o
x
3
● Non-metallic pipes/ducting where minor cracking occurs. Major repairs are to be V

_
N
included in the Duct Repair Manual. a
t
c
o
_
● Cargo/cabin compartment floor panels where repairs are to be limited to the exterior B
o
x
surface. Other repairs are to be included in the SRM. 3

a
V
_
N
a
21.2 Text and illustrations t

c
o
_
B
o
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
A
_
21.3 Layout D
o
c
_
C
o
p
21.3.1 Title of the Page Block y
r
i
g
h
Refer to PRD0002 Module 0 t

_
F
o
o
t
e
21.3.2 Breakdown of approved repairs Task r
V
_
N
TASK (Refer to UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM a
t
(AMTOSS)) c
o
_
B
o
x
Includes: 1
●
V
Task number _
N
● The unique number (5th element) is allocated by the system. a

t
c
● Task title o
_
B
o
x
1
The title may be allocated by the system but can be changed by the author if necessary. It includes a
the FIN(s). V
_
N
a
t
c
General Approved Repairs WARNINGS/CAUTIONS o
_
B
o
x
Refer to Warnings/Cautions. 2
V
_
N
a
Includes general WARNINGS/CAUTIONS applicable to the concerned approved repairs TASK. t
c
o
_
B
Reason for the Job o

x
2
Refer to Para. Reason for the job (Para.1.) a
V
_
N
a
Job Set-up Information t
c
NOTE: o
_
B
The following lists included in this heading are generated by the system; the information is extracted o
x
2
from the text coding and various files. b
V
_
N
Job Set-up a
t
c
Refer to Para.Job Set-Up (Para.3.) o

_
B
o
x
3
Procedure V
Tasks are to be given in logical sequential steps and broken down into Subtasks (Refer to _
N
a
UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM (AMTOSS)). If it t

c
o
is necessary to remove another component for access either refer to the appropriate removal TASK _
B
o
or specify the required removal steps (Refer to Para. Procedure in Page Block 201 for further details x
3
and examples). a
. _
N
a
t
c
o
EXAMPLE _
B
o
x
TASK 32-11-00-300-001 3
b
General Approved Repairs of the Main Landing Gear (MLG) V

_
… N
a
t
4. Procedure c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
A
_
D
o
c
_
N
a
t
Airbus Amber c
o
A
_

a
t
c

_
C
o
d
e
Subtask 32-11-00-350-050-B _
D
o
A. Do the Applicable Repair Procedure c

_
…
C
o
p
y
r
i
Includes WARNINGS/CAUTIONS related to specific steps of task. g

h
t
_
F
o
● After approved repairs task it could be necessary to perform a test. o
t
e
r
The test that is specifically required to be carried out following approved repairs, must be V
_
N
sufficient to ensure that the concerned basic function is correct. Splitting in Subtasks must be a
t
c
limited to functions 861 to 869. o
_
B
Tasks have to be broken down into Subtasks (Refer to UG2100280.4 AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE o
x
TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM (AMTOSS)). 1
V
_
N
a
Close-up t
c
o
_
B
Refer to Para.Close-Up (Para.5.) o

x
1
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
2
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
a
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
x
3
b
V
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
4
_
N
a
t
c
o
_
B
o
Airbus Amber
Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part UG2100280.3

(Page Blocks 201 to 899) Issue: B
22 Referenced Documents
Doc. Reference Title
FM1240006 Request for GSE Tool
FM1506022 Request for STT Tool

How to Initiate and Request a Generic Repair Design Approval Sheet for
M20647
Repair Solutions in AMM/MP/CMM/ESPM/DFPRM
PP1800337 Airbus Reference Language
PRD0051.0 Warnings, Cautions and Typical Sentences
PRD0063.0 2-D Illustrations
SU.ED.03.03 Generate Technical Data
Aircraft Maintenance Manual (AMM) and Air-Vehicle Maintenance (AM)

PRD0002.0
Product Definition
AIRCRAFT MAINTENANCE TASK ORIENTED SUPPORT SYSTEM
UG2100280.4 (AMTOSS)
UG2100280.9 Structural Scheduled Maintenance Tasks
TDG0037.10 MPD Zonal Tasks
TDG0121 IWDS W3D user guide
TDS0002 Illustration Style Standards
TDS0041 Units & Measurement for Technical Data Products
TDS0055 3D Graphic data styles specification
TDS0061 3D Animated Data Product Definition
TDS0116 Technical Data Analysis and Authoring Deliverables
UG1500229.1 DACAS User Guides
UG1501284.3 ACDB User guide
UG1600192.2 GAMS User Guide
UG1700262 3D Preparation for Animation User Guide
UG1700514 Rapid Manual User Guide
UG1800297 Safety Rules Tool : Content Update Request Process

Management of Warnings, Cautions and Typical Sentences in GIPSY and
UG1800601
in DACAS
Printed Copies are not controlled. Confirm this is the latest issue available through the Hub. Page 229 of 241
Airbus Amber

WD1504197 Customer Originated Change processing
WD1601860 MHEA process in Technical Data
WD1702476 Method Links to Maintenance Workflow
Airbus Amber

23 Glossary
Always refer to LEXINET
A/C Aircraft
AC Aircraft Characteristics
AC Alternating Current
ACDB Aircraft Component Data Base
ACMS Aircraft Condition Monitoring System
AD Airworthiness Directive
ADIRU Air Data and Inertial Reference Unit
AFM Aircraft flight Manual
AIPC Airbus Illustrated Part Catalog
AIPS Airbus Process Instruction
AIS Airbus Interior Systems
ALI Airworthiness Limitation Items
ALS Airworthiness Limitation Sections
AMM Aircraft Maintenance Manual
AMTOSS Aircraft Maintenance Task Oriented Support System
ANSU Aircraft Network Server Unit
APU Auxiliary Power Unit
ASD-STE100 Simplified Technical English
ASSY Assembly
ATA Air Transport Association
AWO Authoring Work Order
AOT Airbus all Operator Telex
BDD BITE Description Document
BFE Buyer Furbishing Equipment
BITE Built In Test Equipment
BOM Bill Of Material
BRK Brake
BXL Beluga XL
CADETS Computer Assisted Documentation Education Tutorial System
C/B Circuit Breaker
CAPT Captain
CDCCL Critical Design Configuration Control Limitations
CDF Configuration Data File
CDL Configuration Deviation List
Airbus Amber

CDLS Cockpit Door Locking System
CDS Control and Display System
CFDS Centralized Fault Display System
CISL Central Illustration Standards Library
CLS Cargo Loading System
CML Consumable Material List
CMM Component Maintenance Manual
CMMm Component Maintenance Manual Manufacturer
CMP Configuration Maintenance and Procedures
CMR Certification Maintenance Requirements
CMS Centralized maintenance System
COC Customer Originated Change
CPIOM Core Processing Input/Output Module
CSN Catalog Sequence Number
DACAS Data Centric Authoring System
DAE Design Airworthiness Engineer
DALI Data Assembly Line
DC Direct Current
DET Detailed Inspection
DIS Discard
DLCS Data Loading Configuration System
DO Design Office
DOA Design Organization Approval
DOV Design Office Verification
DU Documentary Unit
EBHA Electrical Backup Hydraulic-Actuator
ECAM Electronic Centralized Aircraft Monitoring
EFIS Electronic Flight Instrument System
EM Engine Manual
ESPM Electrical Standard Practices Manual
EWIS Electrical Wiring Interconnection System
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FC Flight Cycle
FCGU Flight Control and Guidance Unit
FH Flight Hour
FIN Functional Item Number
Airbus Amber

FMD Fault Message Document
FNC Functional Check
FS Fault Symptom
F/O First Officer
FWD Forward
GPS Global Positioning System
GRDAS Genericl Repair Design Approval Sheet
GSE Ground Support Equipment
GTR Ground Test Requirement
GVI General Visual Inspection
HF High Frequency
HFEC High Frequency Eddy Current
HMI Human-Machine Interface
HP High Pressure
ICA Instructions for Continuous Airworthiness
ICS Independent Certification Sheet
ID Inner Diameter
IDG Integrated Drive Generator
IMA Integrated Modular Avionics
ISB Inspection Service Bulletin
ISI In-Service Information
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LH/RH Left Hand/Right Hand
LMP Line Maintenance Part
LP Low Pressure
LR Long Range
LRI Line Replaceable Item
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
LUB Lubrication
MCDU Multipurpose Control and Display unit
MHEA Maintenance Human Error Anal

UG2100280.3 - Iss - D - Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part (Page Blocks 02 To 08)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UG2100280.3 - Iss - D - Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part (Page Blocks 02 To 08)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A

Procedural Support Document t

Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part y

(Page Blocks 02 to 08) _

“Generate Technical Data”. V

- A320 Family / A330/A340 / A380 c

Function: AMM Product Leader Function: HO TD Products Definition V

Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part N

3.1 Interchangeability .............................................................................................................. 19 a

3.2 Customer Originated Changes (COC) ............................................................................... 19 _

3.3 Repairs, Allowable Damage and Flight Allowance............................................................. 19 1

3.3.1 General Rules .............................................................................................................. 19 N

3.3.2 GRDAS workflow .......................................................................................................... 20 o

3.4 Standalone Changes......................................................................................................... 22 x

3.5 Concessions ..................................................................................................................... 24 V

3.8 Maintenance Human Error Analysis (MHEA)..................................................................... 25 V

Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part N

3.13 Deletion or Non Publication of a Task ............................................................................... 29 _

5.2.2 Scheduled TASKS ........................................................................................................ 39 V

5.2.3 Servicing Task .............................................................................................................. 40 t

5.2.3.1 For SA / LR................................................................................................................... 40 B

5.2.3.2 For A380 ...................................................................................................................... 40 V

5.2.4 Component Weight ....................................................................................................... 41 a

5.2.4.1 Component Weight Warning ......................................................................................... 41 _

5.2.4.2 Reason for the Job ....................................................................................................... 41 2

5.3 Job Set-Up Information ..................................................................................................... 42 _

Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part N

5.3.1.1.1 Standard Tool Request ....................................................................................... 43 _

5.3.1.2 The specific tools (also called “Non-standard”) ............................................................. 44 y

5.3.5.1 General Information ...................................................................................................... 61 V

5.3.5.2 How to use EXPD/EXPE/EXPEngine tags .................................................................... 62 t

5.3.6 Cross-references .......................................................................................................... 63 B

5.3.6.1 Internal cross-references .............................................................................................. 63 V

5.3.6.2 External Cross-References ........................................................................................... 65 a

5.3.6.3 Cross-reference to a SIL / TFU / AOT / OIT/ AD / ISI article ......................................... 65 _

5.3.6.3.1 SIL / TFU / OIT / ISI Article ................................................................................. 65 2

5.3.6.3.2 AD / AOT ............................................................................................................ 65 _

Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part N

5.3.6.3.4 Rules for reference to a supplier document ........................................................ 68 _

5.4 Job Set-up......................................................................................................................... 69 _

5.5 Procedure ......................................................................................................................... 78 V

5.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 78 t

5.5.2 Corrective actions ......................................................................................................... 78 B

5.5.3.1 On Board Maintenance System (OMS) Architecture ..................................................... 79 a

5.5.3.2 Data Loading and Configuration System (DLCS) .......................................................... 79 _

5.5.3.3 Data Loading – General principles ................................................................................ 80 2

Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part N

5.5.3.3.3 Tag for the uploading of software to the equipment ............................................ 82 _

BITE task – Access to XML file ........................................................................... 99

5.5.7 Text optimization within the task ..................................................................................111 V

5.5.8 Circuit breaker in the procedure paragraph..................................................................111 t

5.5.9 WARNING to be entered .............................................................................................112 B

5.5.10 Repetition of a privileged data .....................................................................................112 V

5.5.11 Torque value ...............................................................................................................113 a

5.5.11.1 Specific torque values .................................................................................................113 _

5.5.11.2 Standard torque values................................................................................................114 2

5.5.11.2.1 Normal cases ....................................................................................................114 _

Maintenance Procedure (MP) Part N

5.5.11.3 Traceability of torque value source data ......................................................................116 _

5.5.11.4 Units ............................................................................................................................117 _

6.5 Warning/Caution for referenced task ................................................................................125 V

6.6 Warning for CDCCL .........................................................................................................125 t

6.7 Warning related to component weight ..............................................................................126 B